Menu

Jude 1:9 — Word Study

Depth

N1904 δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

BSA<the>ho Butde MichaelMichaēl theho archangel,archangelos [chief messenger, high-ranking angel] whenhote with theho devildiabolos [Satan, the adversary] disputingdiakrinō [argued, contended] he was reasoningdialegō aboutperi <the>ho Moses’Mōusēs, Mōsēs body,sōma [physical person, corpse] notou did daretolmaō [dare, have the courage] a judgmentkrisis [accusation, judgment] to bring against [him]epipherō blasphemyblasphēmia [railing, blasphemous] butalla said;legō Would [that] he rebukeepitimaō [warn, reprove] yousu [as a direct address, in a personal manner] [the] Lord.kurios [God, the Supreme Authority]

Word
Listen & take awayJude 1
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 9 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (kurios) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Jude 1:9quick helps
In a sentenceMichael the archangel did not accuse the devil but instead called on the Lord to rebuke him.
Who is speakingMichael, an archangel, is involved in a dispute with the devil.
Where we areThis verse is part of a broader warning against false teachers and their disrespect for authority.
The hard wordἀρχάγγελος
Take awayEven a high-ranking angel like Michael refrains from slander.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Ellicott & more — read them › clause subject verbδιακρίνω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Jude 1:9

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Michael's Dispute with the Devilgenerated

8Yet in the same way these dreamers defile their bodies, reject authority, and slander glorious beings.
9But even the archangel Michael, when he disputed with the devil over the body of Moses, did not presume to bring a slanderous charge against him, but said, “The Lord rebuke you!”
10These men, however, slander what they do not understand, and like irrational animals, they will be destroyed by the things they do instinctively.
11Woe to them! They have traveled the path of Cain; they have rushed headlong into the error of Balaam; they have perished in Korah’s rebellion.

Jude 1:9 describes a unique encounter where the archangel Michael contends with the devil over Moses' body. This incident highlights the respect for authority and the proper way to address evil, contrasting with the behavior of false teachers who slander and defy authority, as noted in the surrounding verses. Michael's response serves as an example of humility and reliance on God's power rather than personal confrontation.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Daniel 10:13–21However, the prince of the kingdom of Persia opposed me for twenty-one days. Then Michael, one of the chief princes, came to help me, for I had been left there with the kings of Persia.
2Daniel 12:1“At that time Michael, the great prince who stands watch over your people, will rise up. There will be a time of distress, the likes of which will not have occurred from the beginning of nations until that time. But at that time your people—everyone whose name is found written in the book—will be delivered.
3Revelation 12:7Then a war broke out in heaven: Michael and his angels fought against the dragon, and the dragon and his angels fought back.
41 Thessalonians 4:16For the Lord Himself will descend from heaven with a loud command, with the voice of an archangel, and with the trumpet of God, and the dead in Christ will be the first to rise.
5Deuteronomy 34:6And He buried him in a valley in the land of Moab facing Beth-peor, and no one to this day knows the location of his grave.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 14 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἀρχάγγελος, archangelosgenerated

The term ἀρχάγγελος (transliterated as archangelos) refers specifically to a chief angel or archangel, indicating a high rank among angels. It appears in only a few places in the New Testament, including Jude 9 and 1 Thessalonians 4:16. The parsing shows that it is a singular noun, indicating that Michael is one specific archangel.

This word is significant as it denotes authority and leadership among angels. In Jude 9, Michael's role as an archangel underscores the seriousness of the dispute with the devil, as he does not act on his own authority but rather invokes the Lord's authority.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In the Berean Standard Bible, the term ἀρχάγγελος is rendered as archangel, which is consistent across several translations including the KJV and ASV. However, the Young's Literal Translation opts for chief messenger.

The translations differ notably in their rendering of the phrase regarding the devil. The BSB uses slanderous charge, while the KJV and ASV use railing accusation. This reflects different emphases on the nature of the accusation being made.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The verse contains a main clause led by the verb ἐτόλμησεν, did dare, which governs several phrases: a temporal clause introduced by ὅτε (when), and a prepositional phrase detailing the subject of the dispute.

The structure emphasizes the contrast between Michael's restraint and the actions of the devil, illustrating the proper response to evil through reliance on divine authority rather than personal judgment.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

Μωϋσῆς (Moses) is a significant figure in the Septuagint, often associated with the law and God's covenant. The mention of his body in this context connects to the broader narrative of God's authority over life and death.

The term διάβολος (devil) has roots in the Septuagint, where it translates the Hebrew word for adversary, emphasizing the role of Satan as the accuser.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Jude 1:9 tells us about a dispute between Michael the archangel and the devil regarding the body of Moses. Michael did not accuse the devil but instead called upon the Lord to rebuke him. This shows the importance of respecting authority and relying on God's power in the face of evil.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does this verse teach about authority?

This verse illustrates that even an archangel like Michael respects authority and does not take matters into his own hands, instead relying on the Lord's judgment.

Why is the dispute over Moses' body significant?

The dispute highlights the ongoing spiritual conflict and the significance of Moses as a key figure in God's plan, representing the law and God's covenant with His people.

What can we learn from Michael's response to the devil?

Michael's response teaches us the importance of humility and reliance on God's authority rather than resorting to slander or personal attacks.

How does this verse relate to the behavior of false teachers?

The verse contrasts Michael's respectful approach with the slanderous behavior of false teachers, who do not understand the authority they defy.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what situations can I practice humility like Michael did?
  2. How do I respond to conflict or accusations in my life?
  3. What does this passage teach me about the nature of authority?
  4. How can I ensure that I rely on God's power rather than my own in difficult situations?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers reference this verse, discussing the nature of authority and the proper way to address evil.

Clement of AlexandriaFrom the Latin Translation of Cassiodorus c. 150–215
"When Michael, the archangel, disputing with the devil, debated about the body of Moses." Here he confirms the assumption of Moses. He is here called Michael, who through an angel near to us debated with the devil.
Early Church Fathers on Jude 1 →
Tyrannius RufinusAgainst Rufinus 2.18 c. 344–411
You can search them out for yourself from sacred Scripture without my help. And it will become clearly evident to you that this likely is the age of which it was said,
Early Church Fathers on Jude 1 →
JeromeCommentary on Titus 3:1-2 c. 347–420
For he does not say to blaspheme no man: but absolutely no one: not an angel, nor any creature of God. Because everything that was made by God is very good.
Early Church Fathers on Jude 1 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Jude 1:9 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Yet Michael the archangel,.... By whom is meant, not a created angel, but an eternal one, the Lord Jesus Christ; as appears from his name Michael, which signifies, "who is as God": and who is as God,

Read John Gill on Jude 1 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Yet Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing accusation, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.

Read Robert Jamieson on Jude 1 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Michael the archangel: either this is understood of Christ the Prince of angels, who is often in Scripture called an Angel, or of a created angel; and that either: 1. One of the archangels: , Michael is called one of the chief princes, which though the word archangel be not found in the plural number in Scripture, may well imply a plurality of them; for what is one of the chief princes among the angels, but an archangel? Or: 2. A principal angel, or one that is chief among others. When contending with the devil; it may be meant either of Christ contending with the devil, as , in his temptation, and ,2, and ; or rather, of Michael, a created angel. He disputed about the body of Moses: 1. If…

Read Matthew Poole on Jude 1 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(8-10) Application of these three instances to the libertines who are now provoking God. (8) Likewise also.—Rather, Yet in like manner: i.e., in spite of these warnings. These ungodly men were like the unbelievers in the wilderness in denying Christ and scoffing at His promises; they were like the impure angels in leaving that “constitution which is in heaven” (Philippians 3:20) for the base pleasures of earth; they were like the people of Sodom in seeking even these base pleasures by unnatural courses. These filthy dreamers.—We must add also. “Filthy” is not in the original Greek, nor in any previous English version, but is supplied from the next clause; not rightly, for “dreamers” goes…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Jude 1 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 9. Yet Michael the archangel] Of this personage many things are spoken in the Jewish writings "Rabbi Judah Hakkodesh says: Wherever Michael is said to appear, the glory of the Divine Majesty is always to be understood." Shemoth Rabba, sec. ii., fol. 104, 3. So that it seems as if they considered Michael in some sort as we do the Messiah manifested in the flesh. Let it be observed that the word archangel is never found in the plural number in the sacred writings. There can be properly only one archangel, one chief or head of all the angelic host. Nor is the word devil, as applied to the great enemy of mankind, ever found in the plural; there can be but one monarch of all fallen…

Read AdamClarke on Jude 1 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

9. Yet Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil …] It is obvious, from the manner in which St Jude writes, that he assumes that the fact to which he refers was familiar to his readers. No tradition, however, precisely corresponding with this statement is found in any Rabbinic or apocryphal book now extant, not even in the Book of Enoch, from which he has drawn so largely in other instances (Jude 1:6; Jude 1:14). Œcumenius indeed, writing in the tenth century, reports a tradition that Michael was appointed to minister at the burial of Moses, and that the devil urged that his murder of the Egyptian (Exodus 2:12) had deprived him of the right of sepulture, and Origen (de Princ.…

Read Cambridge on Jude 1 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Yet Michael the archangel ... - This verse has given more perplexity to expositors than any other part of the Epistle; and in fact the difficulties in regard to it have been so great that some have

Read Albert Barnes on Jude 1 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

9. Michael—Whence Jude quotes this instance is not clearly known. Origen says, it is a passage quoted from the book entitled “Ascension of Moses;” but the passage as specified by him is not the same with this of Jude.

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Jude 1 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

But even the archangel Michael, when he disputed with the devil over the body of Moses, did not presume to bring a slanderous charge against him, but said, “The Lord rebuke you!”

WEBWorld English Bible2000

But Michael, the archangel, when contending with the devil and arguing about the body of Moses, dared not bring against him an abusive condemnation, but said, “May the Lord rebuke you!”

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

But even the archangel Michael, when he disputed with the devil over the body of Moses, did not presume to bring a slanderous charge against him, but said, “The Lord rebuke you!”

NETBNew English Translation2006

But even when Michael the archangel was arguing with the devil and debating with him concerning Moses’ body, he did not dare to bring a slanderous judgment, but said, “May the Lord rebuke you!”

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Yet Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing accusation, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

But Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing judgment, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.

RVARevised Version, American1894

But Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing judgment, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Yet Michael the archangel, when contending with the devil he disputed about the body of Moses, durst not bring against him a railing accusation, but said, The Lord rebuke thee.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Yet Michael the Archangell, when hee stroue against the deuill, and disputed about the body of Moses, durst not blame him with cursed speaking, but sayd, The Lord rebuke thee.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

But Michael the archangel, when disputing with the devil he reasoned about the body of Moses, did not dare to bring a railing judgment against [him], but said, [The] Lord rebuke thee.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

yet Michael, the chief messenger, when, with the devil contending, he was disputing about the body of Moses, did not dare to bring up an evil-speaking judgment, but said, 'The Lord rebuke thee!'

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

yet Michael, the chief messenger, when disputing with the Devil, reasoning about the body of Moses, did not dare to bring against [him] a judgment of slander, but said, “The LORD rebuke you!”

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

But even Michael the archangel, when he was arguing with the devil and disputing with him about the body of Moses, did not dare to bring a slanderous judgment against him. Instead he said, “May the Lord rebuke you!”

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

When Michael the archangel, disputing with the devil, contended about the body of Moses, he durst not bring against him the judgment of railing speech, but said: The Lord command thee.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Even the archangel Michael, when he was arguing with the devil over Moses' body, didn't dare to condemn him with a slanderous insult, but said, “May the Lord rebuke you.”

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Now when Michael, one of the chief angels, was fighting against the Evil One for the body of Moses, fearing to make use of violent words against him, he only said, May the Lord be your judge.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἀρχάγγελος,archangelos archangel, G743 2 different renderings
archangelASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
chief messengerLSV YLT
διαβόλῳdiabolos devil G1228 2 different renderings
devilASV DBY DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
slanderousBSB FBV MSB NETB ULB
διακρινόμενοςdiakrinō disputing G1252 3 different renderings
contendingASV KJV NWB RVA WEB YLT
disputingDBY LSV ULB
contendedDRA
διελέγετοdialegō he was reasoning G1256 2 different renderings
he reasonedDBY
reasoningLSV
ἐτόλμησενtolmaō did dare G5111 2 different renderings
dareDBY FBV LSV NETB ULB YLT
daredWEB
κρίσινkrisis a judgment G2920 3 different renderings
judgmentASV DBY DRA NETB RVA ULB YLT
accusationKJV NWB
a judgmentLSV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲButclauseὅτεwhenclauseclause · adverbialnoun phrase · adverbialτῷwith theδιαβόλῳdevilverbδιακρινόμενοςdisputingverbδιελέγετοhe was reasoningprepositional phrase · adverbialπερὶaboutnoun phraseτοῦ-noun phraseΜωϋσέωςMoses’σώματοςbodyclauseοὐκnotclausenoun phrase · subjectnoun phrase-ΜιχαὴλMichaelnoun phrasetheἀρχάγγελοςarchangelverbἐτόλμησενdid dareclause · objectnoun phrase · objectκρίσινa judgmentβλασφημίαςblasphemousverbἐπενεγκεῖνto bring against [him]ἀλλὰbutclauseverbεἶπενsaidclauseverbἘπιτιμήσαιRebukeobjectσοιyousubjectΚύριος[the] Lord

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Cum Michaël Archangelus cum diabolo disputans altercaretur de Moysi corpore, non est ausus judicium inferre blasphemiæ : sed dixit : Imperet tibi Dominus.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܡܝܟܐܝܠ ܕܝܢ ܪܝܫ ܡܠܐܟܐ ܗܘ ܕܥܡ ܐܟܠܩܪܨܐ ܟܕ ܕܐܢ ܡܡܠܠ ܗܘܐ ܡܛܠ ܦܓܪܗ ܕܡܘܫܐ ܠܐ ܐܡܪܚ ܕܢܝܬܐ ܥܠܘܗܝ ܕܝܢܐ ܕܓܘܕܦܐ ܐܠܐ ܐܡܪ ܕܢܓܥܘܪ ܒܟ ܡܪܝܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

δὲ Μιχαὴλ ἀρχάγγελος, ὅτε τῷ διαβόλῳ διακρινόμενος διελέγετο περὶ τοῦ Μωϋσέως σώματος, οὐκ ἐτόλμησεν κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας ἀλλ᾽ εἶπεν· ἐπιτιμήσαι σοι κύριος.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Jude 1:9<the><the>δέButButδέΜιχαήλMichaelMichaelΜιχαήλthetheἀρχάγγελοςarchangel,archangel,ἀρχάγγελοςὅτεwhenwhenὅτεwith thewith theδιάβολοςdevildevilδιάβολοςδιακρίνωdisputingdisputingδιακρίνωδιαλέγομαιhe was reashe was reasoninδιαλέγομαιπερίaboutaboutπερί<the><the>ΜωϋσῆςMoses’Moses’Μωϋσῆςσῶμαbody,body,σῶμαοὐnotnotοὐτολμάωdid daredid dareτολμάωκρίσιςa judgmenta judgmentκρίσιςἐπιφέρωto bring agto bring againsἐπιφέρωβλασφημίαblasphemyblasphemyβλασφημίαἀλλάbutbutἀλλάειπενsaid;said;ειπενἐπιτιμάωWould [thatWould [that] heἐπιτιμάωσύyouyouσύκύριος[the] Lord.[the] Lord.κύριοςδιάPrep. throPrep. through, διάἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίἄρχωv. I reignv. I reign, rulἄρχωὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςδιαβάλλωv. I slandv. I slander, cδιαβάλλωσῴζωv. I save,v. I save, healσῴζωβλάσφημοςAdj slandeAdj slanderousβλάσφημοςεἶπονv. I say, v. I say, speakεἶπονπέρανAdv over, Adv over, beyonπέρανμήNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. not, lμήτέλοςn.n. an enn.n. an end, puτέλοςθαρρέωv. I am cov. I am courageθαρρέωἄλλοςAdj other,Adj other, anotἄλλοςμόνοςAdv alone,Adv alone, but,μόνοςσφραγίςn.f. a sign.f. a signet-rσφραγίςτελέωv. I end, v. I end, accomτελέωπαγίςn.f. a snan.f. a snare, tπαγίςἀρχαῖοςAdj originAdj original, pἀρχαῖος
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Jude 1:9

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
δὲde But G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέBut2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ΜιχαὴλMichaēl Michael G3413 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Michael is an archangel, a high-ranking angel in the Bible, mentioned in Jude 9 and Revelation 12:7. His name means 'who is like God?' in Hebrew.
Tyndale gloss
Michael
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Μιχαήλ, transliterated as Michaēl, refers to Michael, the archangel, whose name means 'who like God?' It is indeclinable and appears in the New Testament in Jude 9 and Revelation 12:7. The entries consistently identify Michael as an archangel and suggest he serves as a guardian for the Israelites.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Μιχαήλ, ὁ, indecl. (Heb. מִיכָאֵל, who like God?),

Michael, the Archangel (cf. Da 12:1): Ju 9, Re 12:7.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Μιχαήλ, ὁ, (OND, i. 6. “who like God?’), Michael the name of an archangel, who was supposed to be the guardian angel of the Israelites (Dan. xii. 1; x. 13, 21): Jude 9; Rey. xii. 7. [BB.DD. 5. v.]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Μιχαήλ (Michaēl) — Michael.

Μιχαήλ, ὁ indecl. (Heb. מִיכָאֵל, who like God?),

Michael, the Archangel (cf. Dan.12:1) : Ju 9, Rev.12:7.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Μιχαήλ

Michael

of Hebrew origin (4317); Michael, an archangel:--Michael.

see HEBREW for 04317

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Μιχαήλ, ὁ

Prop.n.

Michael

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Μιχαήλ Michaēl 2x

Michael, the archangel, indecl., Jude 9; Rev. 12:7*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mi'-ka-el, mi'-kel (mikha'el, "who is like God?" Michael):

(1) The father of Sethur the Asherite spy (Nu 13:13).

(2) (3) Two Gadites (1Ch 5:13,14).

(4) A name in the genealogy of Asaph (1Ch 6:40 (Hebrew 25)).

(5) A son of Izrahiah of Issachar (1Ch 7:3).

(6) A Benjamite (1Ch 8:16).

(7) A Manassite who ceded to David at Ziklag (1Ch 12:20).

(8) The father of Omri of Issachar (1Ch 27:18).

(9) A son of King Jehoshaphat (2Ch 21:2).

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Michael

Who is like God? (1.) The title given to one of the chief angels (Dan. 10:13, 21; 12:1). He had special charge of Israel as a nation. He disputed with Satan (Jude 1:9) about the body of Moses. He is also represented as warning against “that old serpent, called the Devil, and Satan, which deceiveth the whole world” (Rev. 12:7-9).

(2.) The father of Sethur, the spy selected to represent Asher (Num. 13:13).

(3.) 1 Chr. 7:3, a chief of the tribe of Issachar.

(4.) 1 Chr. 8:16, a Benjamite.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(who is like God?). An Asherite, father of Sethur, one of the twelve spies. (Numbers 13:13) One of the Gadites who settled in the land of Bashan. (1 Chronicles 5:13) Another Gadite, ancestor of Abihail. (1 Chronicles 5:14) A Gershionite Levite, ancestor of Asaph. (1 Chronicles 6:40) One of the five sons of Izrahiah, of the tribe of Issachar. (1 Chronicles 7:3) A Benjamite of the sons of Beriah. (1 Chronicles 8:16) One of the captains of the "thousands" of Manasseh who joined David at Ziklag. (1 Chronicles 12:20)…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See ARCHANGEL.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%michael
michael100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
ΜιχαήλMichael
what comes after →
Article the
ἀρχάγγελοςa ruler of angel
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΜιχαήλ · 2× in the New Testament
Jude Revelation
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 10 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas
The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.3.3c. AD 140

ὁ δὲ ἄγγελος ο μέγας καὶ ἔνδοξος Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἔχων τὴν ἐξουσίαν τούτου τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ διακυβερνῶν αὐτούς: οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ διδοὺς αὐτοῖς τὸν νόμον εἰς τὰς καρδίας τῶν πιστευόντων: ἐπισκέπτεται οὖν αὐτούς, οἷς ἔδωκεν, εἰ ἄρα τετηρήκασιν αὐτόν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Oxy. 79 5205OxyrhynchosAD 301–AD 500

σε κατὰ τ … κατὰ τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ Ὥρου αρχεφρενεψου φριγξ· ἐξορκίζω σε Γαβριὴλ Ῥαφαὴλ Μιχαὴλ Βουήλ, ἄπελθε εἰς τὸν ι … … ἵνα καταβάλῃς πτωματίσῃς καὶ δήσῃς τοὺς

Stud.Pal. 8 1178Hermopolites (?)AD 401–AD 600

Μιχαὴλ τῷ τέκτονι διὰ Θεοδώρου α … κεράτια ἑπτὰ τέταρτον γίνεται κεράτια … χωρίου

Pap. Congr. XXII (Firenze 1998) p. 480-481 no. 2Aphrodites Kome (AntaiopolitesAD 501–AD 600

τὸ δίκαιον τοῦ ἁγίου τόπου ἄπα Μιχαὴλ τῆς Ἀνταίου διὰ ἐμοῦ Ἁραοῦτος πρεσβυτέρου καὶ οἰκονόμου τῷ θαυμασιωτάτῳ Φοιβάμμωνι Τριαδέλφου· ἔσχον καὶ

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ἀρχάγγελος,archangelos archangel, G743 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means a chief angel, like a high-ranking messenger of God, as seen in 1 Thessalonians 4:16 and Jude 9. It describes an archangel as a powerful spiritual being.
Amplified meaning
chief messenger, high-ranking angel
Tyndale gloss
archangel
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀρχάγγελος (transliterated as archangelos) means 'chief angel' or 'archangel.' It is built from the components for 'chief' and 'angel.' The term appears in the New Testament in 1 Thessalonians 4:16 and Jude 9, indicating a high rank among angels. There are references to various orders of angels in Jewish tradition, with some sources suggesting differing numbers of archangels.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† ἀρχ-άγγελος, -ου, ὁ

(< ἄρχι-, ἄγγελος),

archangel, a chief angel: I Th 4:16, Ju 9 (Cremer, 24; MM, s.v.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀρχ-άγγελος, -ov, 6, (fr. ἄρχι, q- V., and ἄγγελος). a bibl. and 660]. word, archangel, i. 6. chief of the angels (Hebr. Ww chief, prince, Dan. x. 20; xii. 1), or one of the princes and leaders of the angels (DYN O WH, Dan. x. 13): 1 Th. iv. 16; Jude 9. For the Jews after the exile distinguished several orders of angels, and some (as the author of the book of Enoch, ix. 1 sqq.; ef. Dillmann ad loc. p. 97 sq.) reckoned four angels (answering to the four sides of the throne of God) of the highest rank; but others, and apparently the majority (Tob. xii. 15, where ef. Fritzsche; Rev. viii. 2), reckoned seven (after the pattern of the seven Amshaspands, the hichest spirits in the religion of Zoroaster). See 8. vv. Γὰβριήλ and Μιχαήλ.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀρχάγγελος. ‘This title, which is found in the Greek Bible only in 1 Th 415, Jude ®, passed into the magical papyri, e.g. P Lond I. 1219? (ili/a.p.) (=I. p. 92) τῷ κυρίῳ pov τῷ ἀρχαγγέλῳ Μιχαήλ, and the Paris papyrus 57412 (iii/A.D.) ὃ κτίσας θεοὺς kal apxayyéAous. In addition to other references to the syncretic literature of the Imperial period Nageli (p. 48 n?) cites a gnostic inscription from Miletus C/G 2895 ἀρχάγγελον φυλάσσεται ἡ πόλις Μιλησίων. That the word was coined in Judaism to express a Jewish idea is of course obvious: it need only be mentioned that the prefix apy (y. v.) could be attached to any word at will. On Grimm’s note upon the archangelic Heptad reference might be made to the Hibbert Lectures (1912) on Zarly Zoroastrianism, Pp. 241.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀρχάγγελος (archangelos) — archangel.

ἀρχάγγελος, ον,

archangel, [LXX+NT+2nd c.AD+]:—adjective ἀρτ-γελικός, ή, όν, θεοί[Refs 5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀρχάγγελος

archaggelos

from 757 and 32; a chief angel:--archangel.

see GREEK for 757

see GREEK for 32

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀρχάγγελος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a ruler of angels, a superior angel, an archangel

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀρχάγγελος archangelos 2x

an archangel, chief angel, 1 Thess. 4:16; Jude 9*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀρχάγγελος an archangel, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ark-an'-jel. See ANGEL.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Archangel

(1Thess. 4:16; Jude 1:9), the prince of the angels.

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This world is only twice used in the Bible, 1Th 4:16 Jude 1:9. In this last passage it is applied to Michael, who, in Da 10:13,21 12:1, is described as having a special charge of the Jewish nation, and in Re 12:7-9 as the leader of an angelic army. So exalted are the position and offices ascribed to Michael, that many think the Messiah is meant.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning 1Th 4:16; Jude 1:9

→ See ANGEL

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%an archangel
an archangel50% · 1×archangel50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
ἐν
Article the
ΜιχαήλProp
ἀρχάγγελοςarchangel,
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐν
ὅτεwhen
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀρχάγγελος · 2× in the New Testament
1 Thessalonians Jude
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD undated
P.Cair. Masp. 1 67111Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 585

τετάρτης ἰνδικτίονος. ἐν Ἀφροδίτῃ κώμῃ. τὸ δίκαιον τῆς διακονίας τοῦ ἁγίου τόπου ἄπα Μιχαηλίου ἀρχαγγέλου κεκτημένου ἐν τῇ προγεγραμμένῃ κώμῃ τοῦ Ἀνταιοπολίτου νομοῦ, διʼ ἐμοῦ Πανυμφίου … καὶ οἰκονόμου

P.Stras. 9 860AD 501–AD 700

Ἐπαφροδιτιανοῦ καὶ Θεστηνίου καὶ παρακαλ … … ἔγραψέ μοι ἀπολογίαν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ ἀρχαγγέλου … … αρ … … … τη … … δ … … ηνε

P.Rain.Cent. 145ArsinoitesAD 501–AD 700

Μεχεὶρ ιζ ζ ἰνδικτίονος, διὰ Ταρεῦ γαμετῆς Ἐπιμάχου καπήλου· ἀπὸ μέρους ἐνοικίου τοῦ ἀρχαγγέλου Γαβριῆλ, ἀπὸ κερατίων κ, κεράτια πέντε τέταρτον μόνα διʼ ἐμοῦ Θεοδοσίου Ἀκαῦ ἐγράφη

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ὅτεhote when G3753 Adverb
101× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
When indicates a specific point in time, as in Matthew 9:25 and Mark 1:32, where it is used to describe past events, or in 1 Corinthians 13:11, where it is used to describe a current situation.
Tyndale gloss
when
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅτε (transliterated as hote) is a temporal particle meaning 'when.' It is used to indicate specific times or events, often with different verb tenses, such as the indicative, subjunctive, or optative. The New Testament frequently employs it to denote moments in the past or future, appearing in various contexts across multiple books.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅτε, temporal particle (correlat. of πότε, τότε),

when; c. indic., (so generally in cl., but also c. optat., subjc.; LS, s.v.), most freq. c. aor., Mt 9:25, Mk 1:32, Lk 4:25, Jo 1:19, Ac 1:13, Ro 13:11, Ga 1:15, Re 1:17, al.; c. impf., Mk 14:12, Jo 21:18, Ro 6:20, I Th 3:4, al.; c. pf., since, now that, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅτε, a particle of time, [fr. Hom. down], when; ale with the Indicative [W. 296 (278) sq.]; indie. present (of something certain and customary, see Herm. ad Vig. p. 913 sq.), while: Jn. ix. 4; Heb. ix.17; w. an historical pres. Mk. xi. 1. w. the imperfect (of a thing done on occasion or customary): Mk. xiv. 12; xv. 41; Mk. vi. 21 RG; Jn. xxi. 18; Acts xii. 6; xxii. 20; Ro. vi. 20; vii. 5; 1 Co. xiii.11; Gal. iv. 3; Col. iii. 7; 1 Th. iii. 4; 2 Th. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 20. w. an indice. aorist, Lat. quom w. plupf. (W. § 40, 5; [B. § 137, 6]): Mt. ix. 25; xiii. 26,48; xvii. 25 [RG]; xxi. 34; Mk. i. 32; iv. 10; Vili. 19; xv. 20; Lk. ii. 21 sq. 42; iv. 25; vi. [3 LT WH], 13; xxii. 14; xxiii. 33; Jn. i. 19; ii. 22; iv. 45 [where Tdf. ὡς], ete.; Acts i. 13; viii. 12,39; xi. 2; xxi. 5, 35; Xxvil. 39; xxviii. 16; Ro. xiii. 11 (“than when we gave in our allegiance to Christ;” Lat. quom Christo…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅτε (hote) — when.

ὅτε,

also [Refs 5th c.AD+] H., Doric dialect ὅκα, Aeolic dialect ὄτα (which see), Relat. adverb, formed from the Relat. stem ὁ- and τε (see. τε B), answering to demonstrative τότε and interrogative πότ; properly of Time, but sometimes passing into a causal sense (compare ὁπότε).

__A of Time, when, at the time when,

__A.I Constr.:

__A.I.1 with indicative to denote single events or actions in past time, with imperfect or aorist, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; whither are gone the boasts, [which we made] when we said.. ? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; rememberest thou not [the time] when.. ? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄκουσα εὐχομένης ὅτ᾽ ἔφησθα.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b with present, of a thing always happening or now going on,[Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅτε

hote

from 3739 and 5037; at which (thing) too, i.e. when:--after (that), as

soon as, that, when, while.

see GREEK for 3739

see GREEK for 5037

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅτε

Adv

when

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅτε hote 103x

when, at the time that, at what time, Mt. 7:28; 9:25; Lk. 13:35, et al. freq.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
97%when
when97% · 103×other renderings3% · 3×

106 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 101 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
μυκάομαιI bellow, roarγλυκύςsweetοὗτος
γίνομαιI come into being, a
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
μετάλέγωI say, speak
εἰμίI am, exist
νῦνnow, already, atπατήρfather, Father,
ΔαυίδProp
ποιέωI do, make
ὅτεwhen101×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
ἔρχομαιI come, goArticle theἀναβαίνωI go up, mount,
οὖνtherefore, then
ὁράωI see, look uponἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἔρχομαιI come, go
Article the
πέντεIndecἑπτάIndecπάσχαAram
εἰμίI am, exist
νήπιοςan infant, childἐνμετά
ἀνοίγωI open
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅτε · 101× in the New Testament
John Revelation Matthew Mark Luke Acts Galatians 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 46c. AD 40

ταῖς διανοίαις ἐπὶ τὴν πρώτην τῶν ὅλων γένεσιν, ὅτε πρὸ ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης παντοῖα μὲν φυτά, παντοίους δὲ καρποὺς ἤνεγκεν ἡ γῆ, καὶ θεασάμενοι ταῖς διανοίαις ἐλπιζέτωσαν ὅτι καὶ αὖθις οἴσει κατὰ πρόσταξιν τοῦ πατρός, ὅταν αὐτῷ δοκῇ μὴ προσδεηθέντι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.6c. AD 75–95

ἤδη μὲν οὖν καὶ πρότερον διενοήθην, ὅτε τὸν πόλεμον συνέγραφον, δηλῶσαι τίνες ὄντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ τίσι χρησάμενοι τύχαις ὑφʼ οἵῳ τε παιδευθέντες νομοθέτῃ τὰ πρὸς εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ἄσκησιν ἀρετῆς πόσους τε πολέμους ἐν μακροῖς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59363Philadelphia (Arsinoites)244 BC

καὶ σιτομέτρην συναπόστειλον, ὃς ἀποκαταστήσει πρὸς ἡμᾶς. γίνωσκε δὲ τὰς τιμὰς ἐπευωνιζούσας ἑκάστης ἡμέρας, ὅτε μὲν ἡμιωβέλιον , ὅτε δὲ ὀβολοῦ τέταρτον . καὶ τοῦτο ποιήσας ἐν τάχει χαριεῖ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

καταφθείρει ἐγκόπτων αὐτοῖς. διὰ τό, ἀφαιρουμένου τῶν μελισσουργῶν αὐτοῦ βίαι σμήνη ρ, Σώστρατος παρεπιδημῶν, ὅτε ἐπὶ τὸν ὀπισμὸν ἀνέπλευσεν, ἐντυχὼν Διονυσίωι τῶι παρὰ Ζηνοδώρου ἐνεφάνισεν, καὶ ἐκεῖνος φοβηθεὶς ἀφῆκε

P.Dryton 44Pathyris (?)155 BC–143 BC

πυροῦ κε γίνονται πε ὧν φέρει … προέχειν Μυρσίνην κροτῶνος α, τῆι αὐτῆι δέδωκα ὅτε ἔτεκεν κροτῶνος 𐅵 γίνεται α 𐅵, … πυροῦ 𐅵 δ, Μυρσίνηι ἄλλη α 𐅵

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
τῷho with the G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
with the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
διαβόλῳdiabolos devil G1228 Adjective · dative · singular · masculine
37× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for the devil or a false accuser, used to describe Satan in the Bible, such as in Matthew 4:1 and Luke 4:2.
Amplified meaning
Satan, the adversary
Tyndale gloss
devilish/the Devil
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διάβολος is derived from διαβάλλω, meaning slanderous or accusing falsely. It refers to a slanderer or the Devil, particularly in the New Testament, where it is used to denote Satan as the accuser of humanity. Key verses include Matthew 4:1 and 1 Timothy 3:11. The lexicons consistently identify it with the concept of false accusation and malevolence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

διάβολος, -ον

(< διαβάλλω, q.v.)

[in LXX for שָׂטָן (as Jb 1:6), exc. Es 7:4 8:1 (צַר, צָרַר) ;]

slanderous, accusing falsely. As subst., ὁ, ἡ, δ.;

generally (of. Es, ll. c.), a slanderer, false accuser: I Ti 3:6, 7 (CGT, in l., but v. infr.) 3:11, II Ti 3:3, Tit 2:3;

as chiefly in LXX, of Satan, the Accuser, the Devil: Mt 4:1, 5, 8, 11 13:39 25:41, Lk 4:2, 3, 6, 13 8:12, Jo 13:2, Ac 10:38, Eph 4:27 6:11, I Ti 3:6, 7 (but v. supr.),

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

διάβολος, -ov, (διαβάλλω, q. ν.); prone to slander, slanderous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut., al.): 1 Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. ii. 3; as subst. ὁ διάβολος, a calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see κατηγορέω. fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11, 5; [Aristot., al.]): Sept. Esth. vii. 4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. ὁ διάβολος [also διάβ. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118); B. 89 (78)] is applied κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν to the one called in Hebr. jOwn, ὁ σατανᾶς (q. v.), viz. Satan, the prince of demons, the author of evil, persecuting good men (Jobi.; Zech. iii. 1 sqq., cf. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with diseases by means of demons who take possession of their bodies at his bidding; the malignant enemy of God and the Messiah: Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11]; xiii. 39; xxv. 41; Lk. iv. 2, [3, 5 RL, 6, 13]; viii. 12; Jn.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διάβολος (diabolos) — devilish/the Devil.

διάβολ-ος, ον,

slanderous, backbiting, γραῦς [Refs 4th c.BC+]: superlative -ώτατος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; διάβολόν τι, aliquid invidiae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. substantive, slanderer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enemy, [LXX]: hence, = Sâtân,[Refs]; the Devil, [NT]

III. adverb -λως injuriously, invidiously, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

διάβολος

diabolos

from 1225; a traducer; specially, Satan (compare 7854):--false

accuser, devil, slanderer.

see GREEK for 1225

see HEBREW for 07854

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διάβολος, ον

Adj

slanderous, the Slanderer, the Devil

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διάβολος diabolos 37x

slanderer, 1 Tim. 3:11; 2 Tim. 3:3; Tit. 2:3; a treacherous informer, traitor, Jn. 6:70; ὁ διάβολος, the devil

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διάβολος διάβολος, ον slanderous, backbiting, Sup.; διαβολώτατος Ar.

as Subst. a slanderer, Arist.: the slanderer, the Devil, NTest.

adv. -λως, injuriously, invidiously, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DSM — Adjective · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

dev'-'-l. See DEMON; SATAN.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Devil

(Gr. diabolos), a slanderer, the arch-enemy of man’s spiritual interest (Job 1:6; Rev. 2:10; Zech. 3:1). He is called also “the accuser of the brethen” (Rev. 12:10).

In Lev. 17:7 the word “devil” is the translation of the Hebrew sair, meaning a “goat” or “satyr” (Isa. 13:21; 34:14), alluding to the wood-daemons, the objects of idolatrous worship among the heathen.

In Deut. 32:17 and Ps. 106:37 it is the translation of Hebrew shed, meaning…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(slanderer). The name describes Satan as slandering God to man and man to God. The former work is of course, a part of his great work of temptation to evil and is not only exemplified but illustrated as to its general nature and tendency by the narrative of Gen. 3. The other work, the slandering or accusing men before God, is the imputation of selfish motives, (Job 1:9,10) and its refutation is placed in the self-sacrifice of those "who loved not their own lives unto death." [SATAN; DEMON]

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A fallen angel; and particularly the chief of them, the devil, or Satan. He is the great principle of evil in the world; and it is his grand object to counteract the good that God desires to do. He exerts himself, especially with his angels, to draw away the souls of men from embracing salvation through Jesus Christ.

His name signifies the calumniator, or false accuser; as the Hebrew Satan means the adversary. But the Scriptures give him various other appellations descriptive of his character. He is called, "The prince of this world," Joh 12:31; "The prince of the power of the air," Eph 2:2; "The god of this world," 2Co 4:4; "The dragon, that old serpent, the devil," Re 20:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%devil
devil92% · 35×slanderers5% · 2×slanderous3% · 1×

38 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject38%predicate27%adverbial22%indirect object5%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 37 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςὑπόεἰμίI am, exist
μήNeg
σεμνόςhonorableἱεροπρεπήςsuitable to a sa
εἷςone
σύ
υἱόςa son, descendent
ῥᾳδιουργίαcraftiness, vill
ἄσπονδοςimplacable
ἄστοργοςunloving, devoid
διάβολοςdevil37×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theὁράωI see, look uponοὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
εἰς
Article theὄροςa mountain
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπλανάωI lead astray, d
εἰCond
υἱόςa son, descenden

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιάβολος · 37× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Revelation 1 John 1 Timothy John 2 Timothy Acts Ephesians 1 Peter Hebrews James
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 15 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria
Clement of RomeSecond Clement 18.2c. AD 96

καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸς πανθαμαρτωλὸς ὢν καὶ μήπω φυγὼν τὸν πειρασμόν, ἀλλ̓ ἔτι ὢν ἐν μέσοις τοῖς ὀργάνοις τοῦ διαβόλου σπουδάζω τὴν δικαιοσύνην διώκειν, ὅπως ἰσχύσω κἂν ἐγγὺς αὐτῆς γενέσθαι, φοβούμενος τὴν κρίσιν τὴν μέλλουσαν.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 9.3.4c. AD 140

τοῖς οὖν κληθεῖσι πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν ἔθηκεν ὁ κύριος μετάνοιαν: καρδιογνώστης γὰρ ὢν ὁ κύριος καὶ πάντα προγινώσκων ἔγνω τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ τὴν πολυπλοκίαν τοῦ διαβόλου, ὅτι ποιήσει τι κακὸν τοῖς δούλοις τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ πονηρεύσεται εἰς…

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.10.3c. AD 110

ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν εὑρεθῶμεν τῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ: μιμηταὶ δὲ τοῦ κυρίου σπουδάζωμεν εἶναι, τίς πλέον ἀδικηθῇ, τίς ἀποστερηθῇ, τίς ἀθετηθῇ: ἵνα μὴ τοῦ διαβόλου βοτάνη τις εὑρεθῇ ἐν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ̓ ἐν πάσῃ ἁγνείᾳ καὶ σωφροσύνῃ μένητε ἐν Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ σαρκικῶς καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1923AD 326–AD 375

οἶδα μὲν ἀεὶ ὅτι διὰ τῶν ἁγίων σου εὐχῶν σωθήσομαι ἀπὸ παντὸς πειρατηρίου τοῦ διαβόλου καὶ ἀπὸ πάσης ἐπιβουλίας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ νῦν παρακαλῶ ὅπως μνημονεύσῃς μου ἐν ταῖς ἁγίαις

P.Heid. 7 407AD 301–AD 500

θην μάλα εὐχαριστήσας τῷ πανελεήμονι θεῷ ἐ … εργι πάντοτε τὸν διάβολον. τὴν εὐλογίαν, ἣν ἀπέστειλεν ἡ σὴ ἁγιότης διὰ τῶν σῶν παίδων, τὰ τῆς πανηγυρήσεως,

P.Cair. Masp. 1 67064Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 538–AD 547

πρεσβείας τῶν ὁσίων ὑμῶν εὐχῶν ὅπως ῥυσθῶ παρὰ τοῦ Κρείττονος … πατ … τοῦ διαβόλου … ε μεῖζον πάντων προσκυνῶ καὶ ἀσπάζομαι ἐκθύμως τὴν ὑμετέραν πατρικὴν διάθεσιν μετὰ τῶν

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
διακρινόμενοςdiakrinō disputing G1252 Verb · present · middle · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
19× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To judge or doubt means to separate or distinguish between things, as in Matthew 16:3 and 1 Corinthians 11:29. It involves making a decision or forming an opinion.
Amplified meaning
argued, contended
Tyndale gloss
to judge/doubt
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διακρίνω (diakrino) is built from the prefix διά meaning 'through' and the root κρίνω meaning 'to judge.' It covers a range of meanings including to separate, distinguish, decide, and to hesitate or doubt. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as Acts 11:12 and 1 Corinthians 11:29. There is some variation among lexicons regarding its nuances, particularly in the sense of hesitation or doubt.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δια-κρίνω

[in LXX for שׁפט, דִּין, etc. ;]

to separate, hence, to distinguish, discriminate, discern: μηδὲν δ., Ac 11:12; οὐδὲν δ. μεταξύ, Ac 15:9; σε, I Co 4:7; τὸ σῶμα, I Co 11:29.

to settle, decide, judge, arbitrate: Mt 16:3, I Co 6:5 11:29 (ICC, in l.), ib. 31 14:29. Mid, and pass.;

to get a decision, contend, dispute: seq. πρός, Ac 11:2; c. dat. (but v. ICC, in l.), Ju 9; absol., Ju 22 (R, mg.).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δια-κρίνω ; impf. διέκρινον ; 1 aor. διέκρινα ; Mid., [pres. διακρίνομαι ] ; impf. διεκρινόμην ; 1 aor. διεκρίθην (in prof. auth. in a pass. sense, to be separated ; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B. 52 (45)]) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; in Sept. chiefly for DAY, also for 7. ἼΠ| ete. 1. to separate, make a distinction, discriminate, [cf. διά, C. 4]: οὐδὲν διέκρινε μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν, Acts xv. 9; μηδὲν διακρίναντα, making no difference, sc. between Jews and Gentiles, Acts xi. 12 LT Tr WH; like the Lat. distinguo, used emphatically : to distinguish or separate a person or thing from the rest, in effect i.q. to prefer, yield to him the preference or honor: τινά, 1 Co. iv. 7 [ef. W. 452 (421)]; τὸ σῶμα (τοῦ κυρίου), 1 Co. xi. 29. 2. to learn by discrimination, to try, decide: Mt. xvi. 8 [T br. WI reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xiv. 29; ἑαυτόν, 1 Co. xi. 31; to determine, give judgment, decide a…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διακρίνω. The active = ‘‘test,” ‘‘examine” (cf. Mt 16%) in BGU IIT. 747% 50 (A.D. 139) τ]οὺς πράκτορας δ[ι]ακρείνω πρ]ὸς τὸν εἰἰ]σίι]όν[ τ]α ὑπὲρ [τ]ῆς ἰδί[α]ς πρακτωρί[α]ς λόγο[ν] αἱἰ[τ]ούμ[ε]νοίς. It is ‘‘determine,” ‘ decide” in OG/S 434 (iii/B.c.) ἠιητήσατο δικαστὰς καὶ διαλίλακτῆρας τοὺς διακρινοῦντας περὶ τῶν ἀμφ[ισβητουμέν]ων συμβολαίων : c. acc, pers. tb.1* τοὺ]ς δὲ διέκρινομ μετὰ πάσης δικαι[οσύνης. Similarly in .Sy// 92418 (B.c. 210-5) τάς τε δίκας μετὰ τῶν συνιερομναμόνων τὰς μὲν διέλυσε τὰς δὲ διέκρινε δικαίως κατὰ τοὺς νόϊμ]ους : here we have acc. vez, but the same antithesis with διαλύειν as in OG/S 434 (above). It appears again in the passive, of persons in Sy// 17725 (B.C. 303) τὰ δὲ ἐγκλήματα καὶ τὰ συμβόλαια [τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ἑκατέροις, αὐτοὺς πρὸς αὑτοὺς διαλυθῆναι ἢ διακριθῆναι [κατὰ τοὺς ἑκατέρων ν]όμους. The former verb suggests settlement by consent, as against a…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διακρίνω (diakrinō) — to judge/doubt.

διακρίνω [ρῑ],

future -κρῐνῶ, Epic dialect and Delph. -κρῐνέω[Refs 8th c.BC+]:—separate one from another, ὥς τ᾽ αἰπόλια.. αἰπόλοι ἄνδρες ῥεῖα διακρίνωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; part combatants, εἰς ὅ κε δαίμων ἄμμε διακρίνη [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, to be parted, of hair, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.: also in future middle, διακρινέεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; διακρίνεσθαι πρός.. part and join different parties, [Refs]

__b passive, to be divorced, [Refs]

2. in Philosophy, separate, decompose into elemental parts, opposed to συγκρίνω, chiefly in passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. ἄστρων διακρίνει φάη σελάνα probably sets apart, removes, i.e. outshines, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διακρίνω

diakrino

from 1223 and 2919; to separate thoroughly, i.e. (literally and

reflexively) to withdraw from, or (by implication) oppose;

figuratively, to discriminate (by implication, decide), or

(reflexively) hesitate:--contend, make (to) differ(-ence), discern,

doubt, judge, be partial, stagger, waver.

see GREEK for 1223

see GREEK for 2919

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διακρίνω

v.

I distinguish, discern, doubt, hesitate

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διακρίνω diakrinō 19x

to separate, sever; to make a distinction or difference, Acts 15:9; 1 Cor. 11:29; to make to differ, distinguish, prefer, confer a superiority, 1 Cor. 4:7; to examine, scrutinize, estimate, 1 Cor. 11:31; 14:29; to discern, discriminate, Mt. 16:3; to judge, to decide a cause, 1 Cor. 6:5; to dispute, contend, Acts 11:2; Jude 9; to make a distinction mentally, Jas. 2:4; Jude 22; in NT to hesitate, be in doubt, doubt, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διακρίνω fut. -κρι^νῶ to separate one from another, Il.: to part combatants, and in Pass. to be parted, Hom.; so in fut. mid. διακρι^νέεσθαι, Od.; also, διακριθῆναι ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων Thuc.; διακρίνεσθαι πρός . . to part and join different parties, id. Thuc.

Pass. to be dissolved into elemental parts, Plat.

to distinguish, Lat. discernere, τὸ σῆμα Od.; οὐδένα διακρίνων making no distinction of persons, Hdt.: —Pass., διεκέκριτο οὐδέν no distinction was made, Thuc.

to settle, decide, of judges, Hdt., Theocr.:—Mid., νεῖκος δ. to get it decided, Hes.: —Pass. to come to a decision, Il.; περί τινος Plat.: — to contend with one, τινι NTest.; μάχῃ διακρινθῆναι πρός τινα Hdt.

Pass. to doubt, hesitate, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PMP-NSM — Verb · present · middle · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PMP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Middle Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%doubting
doubting26% · 5×contending5% · 1×having discriminated5% · 1×he made distinction5% · 1×he did waver5% · 1×makes different?5% · 1×decide5% · 1×discerning5% · 1×other renderings37% · 7×

19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb95%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μήNeg
καίand, even, also,πίνωI drink, imbibe
μηδείςno one, nothing
αὐτόςπίστιςfaith, belief, t
οὐNeg
θεόςGod, a god
γινώσκωI come to know, lear
οὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
ἹεροσόλυμαProp
εἰς
διακρίνωdisputing19×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheἀπιστίαunbelief, unfaitσῶμαbody, flesh
οὐNeg
μόνοςalone, but, onlyἄνDisj
ἐν
Article theἑαυτοῦ
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἐγώ
πρός
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιακρίνω · 19× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Acts James Jude Matthew Romans Mark
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 19 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.96c. AD 40

τοῦτο γὰρ τὸ γένος διακρίνει καὶ χωρίζει τὰ ἀθάνατα ἀπὸ τῶν θνητῶν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.259c. AD 75–95

Καὶ περὶ τῶν ζῴων δὲ διέκρινεν ἕκαστον, ὅτι τρέφοιντο καὶ οὗ πάλιν ἀπεχόμενοι διατελοῖεν, περὶ ὧν ἐν οἷς ἂν ἡμῖν ἀφορμὴ τῆς γραφῆς γένηται διελευσόμεθα τὰς αἰτίας προστιθέντες, ἀφʼ ὧν κινηθεὶς τὰ μὲν αὐτῶν βρωτὰ ἡμῖν ἐκέλευσεν εἶναι, τῶν δὲ…

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 7.1.6c. AD 140

ὁ οὖν διδοὺς ἀθῷός ἐστιν: ὡς γὰρ ἔλαβεν παρὰ τοῦ κυρίου τὴν διακονίαν τελέσαι, ἁπλῶς αὐτὴν ἐτέλεσεν, μηθὲν διακρίνων, τίνι δῷ ἢ μὴ δῷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD undated
Pap. Congr. XXIV (Helsinki 2004) p. 111-128Sadaqa (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 574

διάκονον τῆς ἁγιωτάτης ἡμῶν ἐκκλησίας καὶ τὸν εὐδοκιμώτατον Θωμᾶν Βοήθου πρίορα τοῦδε τοῦ κάστρου διακρῖναι μεταξὺ αὐτῶν … ξι … διαλῦσαι καὶ ἐγγράφως τυπῶσαι τὴν κρίσιν κατὰ τὸ φαινόμενον

BGU 3 747date unknown

τῇ ἐκπράξει καὶ ὑπὸ χεῖρα καὶ πρὸς τὸν διαλογισμὸν κατὰ μῆνα μεταπεμπόμενος τοὺς πράκτορας διακρίνω πρὸς τὸν εἰσιόντα ὑπὲρ τῆς ἰδίας πρακτωρίας λόγον αἰτούμενα πληροφορεῖν ἐπ … κ

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
διελέγετοdialegō he was reasoning G1256 Verb · imperfect · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singular
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To dispute or argue with someone, like in Acts 18:4 where Paul discusses with the Jews in Corinth. It can also mean to preach or reason with others, as seen in Acts 17:17. This word is about exchanging ideas and opinions.
Tyndale gloss
to dispute
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διαλέγομαι is a middle voice verb meaning to converse, discuss, or argue. It is built from the prefix δια- (through) and the root λέγω (to say). The term appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably in Acts, where it is used to describe reasoning and discourse, such as in Acts 17:2 and 18:4. The lexicons generally agree on its meanings, with no significant disagreements noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δια-λέγομαι

(mid. of διαλέγω, to pick out, distinguish, as depon.),

[in LXX: Ex 6:27, Is 63:1 (דּבר pi.), Jg 8:1 (ריב), I Es 8:46, Es 5:2, Si 14:20, II Mac 11:20 * ;]

to converse with, discourse (v. Cl. Rev., i, 45), discuss, argue: Ac 18:4 19:8, 9 20:9; c. dat. pers., Ac 17:17 18:19 20:7, He 12:5; seq. πρός, Mk 9:34, Ac 17:17 24:12…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δια-λέγομαι ; impf. διελεγόμην ; [1 aor. 3 pers. sing. δὲελέξατο (LT Tr WH in Acts xvii. 2; xviii. 19)]; 1 aor. διελέχθην ; (mid. of διαλέγω, to select, distinguish) ; at: to think different things with one’s self, mingle thought with thought (cf. διαλογίζομαι) ; to ponder, revolve in mind ; so in Hom. 2. as very freq. in Attic, to converse, discourse with one, argue, discuss: absol., Acts [xviii. 4]; xix. 8 sq.; [xx. 9]; περί τινος, Acts xxiv. 25; τινί, with one, Acts xvii. 17; xviii. 19; xx. 7; Heb. xii. 5; ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν, drawing arguments from the Scriptures, Acts xvii. 2; πρός twa, Acts xvii. 17; xxiv. 12; with the idea of disputing prominent: πρὸς ἀλλήλους, foll. by interrog. tis, Mk. ix. 34; περί twos, Jude 9.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διαλέγομαι. P Oxy X. 1349 (iv)A.D.) ἐπειδὴ ἐξῆλθα ἀπὸ σοῦ ἐχθὲς μὴ διαλεχθείς σοι περὶ τῆς κυθίδος (ἡ. ε. κυθρ. -- χυτρ.). VP Petr 1ΠΠ. 43 (3)!® (B.c. 240) ἔτι δὲ [οὐ]κ ἀγνοεῖς ὡς σοὶ διελέγην περὶ τοῦ ση[σ]άμου, ‘you know how I conversed with you about the sesame” (Edd.). BGU IV. 10804 (2 ili/a.D.) καθὼς οὖν 6 ἀδελφός σου ᾿Αμμωνᾶς διείλεκταί μοι περὶ ὑμῶν καὶ τῶν ὑμῶν πραγμάτων. P Flor II. 132% (A.D. 257) τοῖς κωμάρχαις τῆς Tavpetvou διελέχθην περὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ὀνηλάτου. These instances will suffice to show that διαλέγεσθαι has in the vernacular the use seen in Mk οὗ, Elsewhere in the NT, as Bp E. L. Hicks points out in Ολ᾽ 1. p. 45, “*it always is used of addressing, preaching, lecturing,” a use which he shows to be predominant in…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διαλέγω (dialegō) — to dispute.

διαλέγω,

pick out, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πτῶμα glean fallen olives, [Refs]; compare διαλέγειν· ἀνακαθαίρειν, [Refs 5th c.AD+]; select, separate, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; examine, check documents, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. διαλέγων τὴν ὀπήν picking open the hole, to escape, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare διαλέξαι· διορύξαι, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

__B as deponent verb, διαλέγομαι: future διαλέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] also -λεχθήσομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; -λεγήσομαι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist διελεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect imperative ζάλεξαι [Refs 7th c.BC+], and always in Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs]: less frequently aorist 2 διελέγην [Refs 4th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural διέλεγεν [Refs]: perfect διείλεγμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect διείλεκτο [Refs 4th c.BC+], but in passive sense, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διαλέγομαι

dialegomai

middle voice from 1223 and 3004; to say thoroughly, i.e. discuss (in

argument or exhortation):--dispute, preach (unto), reason (with),

speak.

see GREEK for 1223

see GREEK for 3004

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διαλέγομαι

v.

I converse, address, preach, lecture

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διαλέγομαι dialegomai 13x

to discourse, argue, reason, Acts 17:2, 17; 24:12; to address, speak to, Heb. 12:5; to contend, dispute, Mk. 9:34; Jude 9

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-INI-3S — Verb · imperfect · no voice stated · indicative · third person · singular
imperfect no voice stated indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-INI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ With God Job 13:3,17-28

→ God reasons with men Ex 4:11; 20:5,11; Isa 1:18; 5:3,4; 43:26; Ho 4:1; Mic 6:2

→ Natural understanding Da 4:36

→ To be applied to godly living 1Co 10:15; 1Pe 3:15

→ Not a sufficient guide in human affairs De 12:8; Pr 3:5; 14:12

→ Of the Pharisees Lu 5:21,22; 20:5

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
23%he was reasoning
he was reasoning23% · 3×reasoning23% · 3×he reasoned15% · 2×talking8% · 1×as is talking8% · 1×when reasoning8% · 1×addresses8% · 1×they had been discussing8% · 1×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
τρεῖςthree
σάββατονthe Sabbath, a wμήν (II)a month
γάρfor
ἀλλήλων
συναγωγήan assembly, congreg
Article the
ἡμέραa day
κατά
ΠαῦλοςPaul
Article the
διαλέγομαιhe was reasoning13×
what comes after →
ἐν
Article the
αὐτός
ἀπόμέλλωI am about to
δέbut, on the other ha
ἐναὐτός
Article the
ἸουδαῖοςJewishΠαῦλοςPaul
μένDisj
οὖνtherefore, then

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιαλέγομαι · 13× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Jude Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.101c. AD 40

ὅτε μὲν παραινεῖ ἀπὸ παντὸς ξύλου τοῦ παραδείσου ἐσθίειν, ἕνα προτρέπει, ὅτε δὲ ἀπαγορεύει χρῆσθαι τῷ πονηροῦ καὶ καλοῦ αἰτίῳ, πλείοσι διαλέγεται·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.89c. AD 75–95

Ταῦτʼ εἰπὼν προάγει τὸν λαὸν γυναιξὶν ὁμοῦ καὶ τέκνοις, ὡς ἀκούσαιεν τοῦ θεοῦ διαλεγομένου πρὸς αὐτοὺς περὶ τῶν πρακτέων, ἵνα μὴ βλαβείη τῶν λεγομένων ἡ ἀρετὴ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης γλώττης ἀσθενῶς εἰς γνῶσιν αὐτοῖς παραδιδομένη.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
PSI 4 330Philadelphia (Arsinoites)258 BC

ἡμᾶς μεταλαβεῖν, οὗτος δὲ τῆι μεγίστηι με ἀτιμίαι περιβέβληκεν. περὶ μὲν γὰρ διαφόρου οὐ διαλέγομαι ὅσον εἰσενήνοχα ἀδίκως μετὰ βίας παρανομηθείς. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους κη, Δύστρου ιη.

Stud.Pal. 5 50Hermopolis (HermopolitesAD 201–AD 300

Ἰσίδωρος αι … … … θυμότερον η … … … υ διαλέγομαι ου … … χορηγίας ἥτις … … ν τισιν ταυ … … … τὰ

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
περὶperi about G4012 Preposition
333× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for about or around, used in various contexts such as place, cause, or time. It is often translated as 'about' or 'concerning' in the KJV, and appears in many passages, including Matthew 2:8 and John 16:26.
Tyndale gloss
about
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

One of the workhorse prepositions, standing 333 times. With the genitive it means about, concerning, with reference to. There is no hidden depth here, and it would be a mistake to look for one: its usefulness is that it marks the subject a sentence is circling. In this verse it points at what the earlier accounts were about.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περί, prep. c. gen., acc. (in cl. also c. dat.; cf. M, Pr., 105f.),

with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides).

C. gen.,

of place, about (poët.).

Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mt 2:8, Mk 1:44, Lk 4:38, Jo 16:26, Ac 28:21, al. mult.; τὰ περί, c. gen., the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mk 5:27, Ac 1:3 28:15, Eph 6:22, al.; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, I Co 7:1, al.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περί, (akin to πέρα. πέραν ; [Curtius § 359]), prep., joined in the N. T. with the gen. and the ace. (in class. Grk. also with the dat.), and indicating that the person or thing relative to which an act or state is predicated is as it were encompassed by this act or state ; Lat. circum, circa; around, about. I. with the GeniTIve it denotes that around which an act or state revolves ; about, concerning, as touching, ete., (Lat. de, quod attinet ad, causa w. a gen., propter) [ef. W. 372 sq. (349)]. a. about, concerning, (Lat. de; in later Lat. also circa): after verbs of speaking, teaching, writing, ete., see under ἀναγγέλλω, ἀπαγγέλλω, ἀπολογοῦμαι, γογγύζω, γράφω, Sydow, διαβεβαιοῦμαι, διαγνωρίζω, διαλέγομαι, διδάσκω. διηγοῦμαι (Heb. xi. 32), διήγησις, εἶπον and προεῖπον, ἐπερωτάω and ἐρωτάω, κατηχέω, λαλέω, λέγω, λόγον αἰτέω. λόγον ἀποδίδωμι, λόγον δίδωμι, μαρτυρέω, μνεία, μνημονεύω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περί τροπὴν δέδωκα, “1 have entrusted to him the care of the whole matter” (Edd.), 7. XII. 15831! (ii/A.D.) γράψον μοι περὶ τῶν ὄντων, ‘ write me revarding the present state of affairs,” and ΒΟῸΣ II. 63218 (ii/a.p.) (= ZAZ, p. 173) ο[ὐ]χ ὀκνῶ σοι γράψαι περὶ THs] σωτηρίας pov καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν, “T am not delaying to write you regarding the health of me and mine.” In P Par 488 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski Zp.” p- 91) ἀκούσαντες... τὰ περὶ σου συνβεβηκότα, we have a mixture of ἀκούσαντες περὶ σοῦ and ἀκούσαντες τά (σοι) συνβεβηκότα ΠΕερί, ‘‘ with regard to,” at the beginning of a new clause (as in 1 Cor 71) may be illustrated from the headings in the Mysteries inscr, from Andania Sy// 653 (=*736)} (B.c. 91) περὶ ἱε]ρῶν Kal ἱερᾶν, α΄. See also P Eleph 134! (B.c, 223-2) περὶ δὲ τῶν εἴκοσι δραχμῶν οὔπω ἐκεκόμιστο Φίλων . περὶ δὲ τοῦ οἰναρίου ΤΙραξιάδης οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ, BGU IV. 1097° (time of…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περί (peri) — about.

περί,

Thess., Delph. περ [Refs 5th c.BC+], also Aeolic dialect, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+] V; Elean παρ [Refs]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative:—round about, all round (properly different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Sanskrit pári 'round about'.)

__A WITH GENITIVE,

__A.I of Place, sometimes in Poets, round about, around, τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς [Refs 8th c.BC+], on both sides, see at {περιβαίνω} [Refs]

__A.I.2 about near, π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα [Refs]

__A.II to denote the object about or for which one does something:

__A.II.1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περί

peri

from the base of 4008; properly, through (all over), i.e. around;

figuratively with respect to; used in various applications, of place,

cause or time (with the genitive case denoting the subject or occasion

or superlative point; with the accusative case the locality, circuit,

matter, circumstance or general period):--(there-)about, above,

against, at, on behalf of, X and his company, which concern, (as)

concerning, for, X how it will go with, ((there-, where-)) of, on,

over, pertaining (to), for sake, X (e-)state, (as) touching,

(where-)by (in), with. In comparative, it retains substantially the

same meaning of circuit (around), excess (beyond), or completeness

(through).

see GREEK for 4008

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περί

Prep.

about, concerning, around

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περί peri 333x

pr. of place, (1) gen., about, around; about, concerning, respecting, Mt. 2:8; 11:10; 22:31; Jn. 8:18; Rom. 8:3, et al. freq.; (2) acc., of place, about, around, round about, Mt. 3:4; Mk. 3:34; Lk. 13:8; οἱ περί τινα, the companions of a person, Lk. 22:49; a person and his companions, Acts 13:13; simply a person, Jn. 11:19; τὰ περί τινα, the condition, circumstances of any one, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περί around, round about with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radical sense, round about, all round, whereas ἀμφί properly means on both sides.

WITH GENITIVE:

of Place, round about, around, Lat. circum, Od.

about, near, ἑσδόμεναι περὶ σεῖο Mosch.

Causal, to denote the object about or for which one does something:

with Verbs of fighting or contending, μάχεσθαι περὶ πτόλιος Il.; περὶ Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος id. Il.; so, τρέχειν περὶ ἑωυτοῦ, περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς Hdt.

about, for, on account of, μερμηρίζειν περί τινος Il.; φροντίζειν περί τινος Hdt.

with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, about, concerning, Lat. circa, de, περὶ νόστου ἄκουσα Od., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

a-bout': The use of this word as a preposition, in the sense of "around," is confined to the Old Testament. In the New Testament, generally an adverb, for Greek hos or "hosei." The Revised Version (British and American) adopts it in several idiomatic translations of mello, referring to what is about to be, i.e. on the point of occurring, or immediately impending, amending the King James Version, in Ac 5:35; 27:2; Re 12:4, etc.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%concerning
concerning59% · 199×about16% · 55×for13% · 45×around6% · 19×of3% · 9×other renderings3% · 9×

336 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object8%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 333 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,ἀκούωI hear, listen
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakλαλέωI speak, sayἐρωτάωI ask, question,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἁμαρτίαa sinἀλλάbut, except
μαρτυρέωI witness, testify
Article theἐγώἵναin order that, s
σύ
μέλειit is a care, itγράφωI writeΦαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
περίabout333×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusβασιλείαkingship, sovereτράχηλοςthe neck
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becοὐαίindcl
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἵναin order that, sArticle the
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becἀδελφόςa brotherArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ὅςArticle theοὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπερί · 333× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Hebrews Mark 1 Corinthians 1 John 1 Thessalonians Romans 1 Peter Jude

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 297 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

περιέχει γὰρ τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον ἐξαίρετον, ὡς ὁ περὶ αὐτῆς λόγος μηνύει.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.5c. AD 100

λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

νδ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀδύνατος ὄμμασι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι περὶ Πάθυριν γῆν ἤπειρον σιτοφόρον ἀρουρῶν … ἧς γείτονες νότουπλατεῖαὁδός, βορρᾶ … περίχωμα … προπεπρα

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
τοῦho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSN — Article · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ΜωϋσέωςMōusēs, Mōsēs Moses’ G3475 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
80× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Moses was the Hebrew lawgiver, who received the Ten Commandments from God. He is mentioned in Matthew 8:4 and 17:3-4. Moses is a key figure in the Bible.
Tyndale gloss
Moses
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Μωϋσῆς (transliterated as Mōusēs) refers to Moses, the Hebrew lawgiver. It appears in various forms in the New Testament, including references to the law of Moses and the books attributed to him. Notably, there are variations in spelling, with Μωσῆς also being used. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dat. -ῆ (as LXX: Ex 5:20, al.), and -εῖ, acc. -ῆν (as LXX) and -έα (Lk 16:29 only), (Heb. מֹשֶׁה),

Moses: Mt 8:4 17:3, 4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Lk 2:22 24:44, Jo 7:23, Ac 13:39 15:5 28:23, I Co 9:9, He 10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Lk 16:29 24:27, Ac 15:21, II Co…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Μωσῆς (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo (16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in Philo [cf. his “ Buch ν. ἃ. Weltschopf.” ed. Miiller p. 117 (but Richter in his ed. has adopted Μωῦσῆς)], after the Hebr. form Aw, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. Aw to draw out), and Mwic4s (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s 4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [“in Josephus the readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the classic form (Μωσῆς), which moreover is the common form in his writings,” Miiller’s note on Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 1, 31,4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt Moiojs uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. ef. Otto’s note on Justin Mart. apol. i. § 32 init.], and in the N. T. ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian watersaved, i. 6. ‘saved from water’; οἵ. Fritzsche, Rom. vol. ii. p. 818; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.824; Knobel on Ex. ii.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς (Mōusēs, Mōsēs) — Moses.

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה),

Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Μωϋσῆς

Moseus

or Moses mo-sace',

or Mouses mo-oo-sace'

of Hebrew origin; (4872); Moseus, Moses, or Mouses (i.e. Mosheh), the

Hebrew lawgiver:--Moses.

see HEBREW for 04872

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Μωσῆς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

Moses

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Μωϋσῆς Mōysēs 80x

also spelled Μωσῆς, Moses, pr. name, Mt. 8:4; Jn. 1:17; Rom. 5:14

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mo'-zez, mo'-ziz (mosheh; Egyptian mes, "drawn out," "born"; Septuagint Mouse(s)). The great Hebrew national hero, leader, author, law-giver and prophet.

I. LIFE

1. Son of Levi

2. Foundling Prince

3. Friend of the People

4. Refuge in Midian

5. Leader of Israel

II. WORK AND CHARACTER

1. The Author

2. The Lawgiver

3. The Prophet

LITERATURE

The traditional view of the Jewish church and of the Christian church, that Moses was a person and that the narrative with which his life-story is interwoven is real history, is in the main sustained by commentators and critics of all classes.

It is needless to mention the old writers among whom these questions were hardly under discussion. Among the advocates of the current radical criticism may be mentioned Stade and Renan, who minimize the historicity of the Bible narrative at this point. Renan thinks the narrative "may be very probable." Ewald, Wellhausen…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Moses

Drawn (or Egypt. mesu, “son;” hence Rameses, royal son). On the invitation of Pharaoh (Gen. 45:17-25), Jacob and his sons went down into Egypt. This immigration took place probably about 350 years before the birth of Moses. Some centuries before Joseph, Egypt had been conquered by a pastoral Semitic race from Asia, the Hyksos, who brought into cruel subjection the native Egyptians, who were an African race. Jacob and his retinue were accustomed to a shepherd’s life, and on their arrival in Egypt were received with favour by the king, who assigned them the “best of the land”, the land of Goshen, to dwell in. The Hyksos or “shepherd” king who thus showed favour to Joseph and his family was in all probability the Pharaoh Apopi (or Apopis).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(Heb. Mosheh , "drawn," i.e. from the water; in the Coptic it means "saved from the water"), the legislator of the Jewish people, and in a certain sense the founder of the Jewish religion. The immediate pedigree of Moses is as follows: Levi was the father of: Gershon -- Kohath -- Merari Kohath was the father of: Amram = Jochebed Amram = Jochebed was the father of: Hur = Miriam -- Aaron = Elisheba -- Moses = Zipporah Aaron = Elisheba was the father of: Nadab -- Abihu -- Eleazar -- Ithamar Eleazar was the father of: Phineas Moses = Zipporah was the father of: Gershom -- Eliezer Gershom was the father of: Jonathan The history of Moses naturally divides itself into three periods of 40 years each. Moses was born at Goshen, In Egypt, B.C. 1571. The story of his birth is thoroughly Egyptian in its scene. His mother made extraordinary efforts for his preservation from the general destruction of…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The name of the illustrious prophet and legislator of the Hebrews, who led them from Egypt to the Promised Land. Having been originally imposed by a native Egyptian princess, the word is no doubt Egyptian in its origin, and Josephus gives its true derivation—from the two Egyptian words, MO, water, and USE, saved. With this accords the Septuagint form, MOUSES. The Hebrews by a slight change accommodated it to their own language, as they did also in the case of some other foreign words; calling it MOSHIE, from the verb MASHA, to draw. See Ex 2:10. Moses was born about 15.71 B. C., the son of Amram and Jochebed, of the tribe of Levi, and the younger brother of Miriam and Aaron. His history is too extensive to permit insertion here, and in general too well known to need it. It is enough simply to remark, that it is divided into three…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
95%moses
moses95% · 75×moses?3% · 2×moses’3% · 2×

79 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject50%adverbial25%object9%indirect object8%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 80 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίἐκδέbut, on the othe
νόμοςa law, the Mosaic La
Article theἐντὶς
καίand, even, also, nam
εἷςoneνεκρόςdead, a corpseγίνομαιI come into bein
προστάσσωI instruct, command,
ὅςκαθώςjust as, as
διδάσκαλοςa teacher
λέγωI say, speak
ΜωϋσῆςMoses’80×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἨλίαςElijahεἰμίI am, exist
εἰς
μαρτύριονwitness, evidencὅς
γάρfor
λέγωI say, speakἐκγράφωI write
δίδωμιI offer, give
σύArticle the
λέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCondἐγώἔκφοβοςgreatly terrifie

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΜωϋσῆς · 80× in the New Testament
Acts John Hebrews Luke Mark Matthew Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Jude Revelation
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 600 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 2c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δ’ ἑκάτερον ὑπερβάς, τὸ μὲν ὡς ἄσκεπτον καὶ ἀταλαίπωρον καὶ ἀφιλόσοφον, τὸ δ’ ὡς κατεψευσμένον καὶ μεστὸν γοητείας, παγκάλην καὶ σεμνοτάτην ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο τῶν νόμων, μήτ’ εὐθὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἢ τοὐναντίον ὑπειπὼν μήτ’, ἐπειδὴ προτυπῶσαι τὰς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.21c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο δὴ παιδεῦσαι βουληθεὶς Μωυσῆς τὸ παίδευμα τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ πολίτας τῆς τῶν νόμων θέσεως οὐκ ἀπὸ συμβολαίων καὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους δικαίων ἤρξατο τοῖς ἄλλοις παραπλησίως, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὴν τοῦ κόσμου κατασκευὴν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἀναγαγὼν καὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.7c. AD 100

ἡμῶν μέν: ἀλλ̓ ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως εἰς τέλος ἀπώλεσαν αὐτὴν λαβόντος ἤδη τοῦ Μωϋσέως.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1916Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

καὶ ἄπα Σουροῦ καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς περὶ ὑμᾶς κατʼ ὄνομα Μωυσῆς καὶ Ἑριηοῦς οἱ ὑποδεέστεροι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ χαίρειν. πρῶτον μὲν τὴν προσκύνησιν ὑμῶν ποιούμενοι,

Stud.Pal. 8 799Arsinoites (?)AD 401–AD 600

παρέσχε Μωυσῆς ἀπὸ φόρου κήπου νομισμάτια δύο ῥυπαρὰ νομισμάτια β ῥυπαρὰ μόνα Τῦβι ε η ἰνδικτίονος

BGU 3 736Arsinoiton PolisAD 544

ζ η ἰνδικτίωνος ἐπʼ Ἀρσινόης. Αὐρήλιοι Ἀπόλλων υἱὸς Ἀ … α … … καὶ Μωύσης υἱὸς Γεροντίου ἀπὸ κώμης Δι … Αὐρηλίῳ ἄπα Ὂλ υἱῷ Ἰουλίου … ρ

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
σώματος,sōma body, G4983 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
142× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word for body refers to the whole physical person, used literally or figuratively in the Bible, as seen in Matthew 27:58 and 1 Corinthians 6:13.
Amplified meaning
physical person, corpse
Tyndale gloss
body
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word σῶμα (lemma: sōma) means 'body' and can refer to both living and dead bodies, as well as the concept of a person or material substance. In the New Testament, it is used to describe the human body, the Church as the body of Christ, and even inanimate objects. The term contrasts with πνεῦμα (spirit) and ψυχή (soul), highlighting its physical nature.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σῶμα, -τος, τό,

[in LXX for גְּוִיָּה ,בָּשָׂר, etc., and for Aram. נְבֵלָה ;]

a body.

Prop., of the human body,

as always in Hom. (opp. to δέμας), of the dead body: Mt 27:58, 59 Mk 15:43, al.;

of the living body: Lk 11:34, I Co 6:13, al.; ἐν σ. εἶναι, He 13:3; as the instrument of the soul, τὰ διὰ τοῦ σ., II Co 5:10; opp. to πνεῦμα, Ro 8:10, I Co 5:3 7:4, Ja 2:26; to ψυχή, Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σῶμα, -τος, τό, (appar. fr. σῶς ‘entire’, [but cf. Curtius § 570; al. fr. r. ska, sko, ‘to cover’, ef. Vaniéek p. 1055; Curtius p. 696]), Sept. for “3, "3, etc.; nba3 (a corpse), also for Chald. BW2; α body; and 1. the body both of men and of animals (on the distinction between it and σάρξ see σάρξ, esp. 2 init.; (cf. Dickson, St. Paul's use of ‘ Flesh’ and ‘Spirit’, p. 247 sqq.]); a. as everywh. in Hom. (who calls the living body δέμας) and not infreq. in subseq. Grk. writ., a dead body or corpse: univ. Lk. xvii. 37; of a man, Mt. xiv. 12 RG; (Mk. xv. 45 R G];, Acts ix. 40; plur. Jn. xix. 31; τὸ σ. τινος, Mt. xxvii. 58 sq.; Mk. xv. 43; Lk. xxiii. 52,55; Jn. xix. 38, 40; xx. 12; Jude 9; οὗ the body of an animal offered in sacrifice, plur. Heb. xiii. 11 (Ex. xxix. 14; Num. xix. 3). b. as in Grk. writ. fr. Hesiod down, the living body : —of animals, Jas. iii. 3;—of man: τὸ σῶμα, absol.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σῶμα, “ἐᾷ body” (1) properly of the human body (a) cf. P Cairo Zen I. 5903429 (B.c. 257) peta τῆς τοῦ σώματος ὑγιείας, and the common salutation, as in 24. 590369 (B.c. 257), εἰ τῶι τε σώματι Eppwoat καὶ τἄλλα σοι κατὰ γνώμη[ν] ἐστίν, εἴη ἂν ὡς ἡμεῖς θέλομεν. See also BGU IV. 120848 (B.c. 27-26) τὰ δὲ] ἄλλα χαριεῖ τοῦ σώμαί( τος) [ἐπι μείλόμενος) ty’ ὑγιένῃς, ὃ δὴ μέγιστον ἡγοῦμίαι, PSI VII. 8ογ33 (a.p. 280) where a prisoner petitions ἔχειν τὸ σῶμα ἐλεύθερον καὶ ἀνύβριστον, and the magic P Lond 121°89 (jji/A.D.) (=I. p. 103) διαφύλασσέ pov τὸ σῶμα τὴν ψυχὴν ὁλόκληρον. Cf. Aristeas 139 ἁγνοὶ καθεστῶτες κατὰ σῶμα καὶ κατὰ ψυχήν. The tripartite division of I Thess 559 is found in P Oxy VIII. 1161° (iv/a.p.), where the writer (a Christian) prays to our God and the gracious Saviour and His beloved Son, ὅπως οὗτοι πάντες β[ο]ηθήσωσιν ἡμῶν τῷ σώματι, τῇ ψυχῇ, τῴ... πν(εύματι). For the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σῶμα (sōma) — body.

σῶμα, ατος, τό

[Refs 4th c.AD+] dative plural σωμάτεσι [Refs 3rd c.BC+], body of man or beast, but in [Refs 8th c.BC+], always dead body, corpse (whereas the living body is δέμας), ὥς τε λέων ἐχάρη μεγάλῳ ἐπὶ σώματι κύρσας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ς. δὲ οἴκαδ᾽ ἐμὸν δόμεναι πάλιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so also in [NT+8th c.BC+]; νεκρὸν σ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; μέγιστον σ... σποδου, ={σ. μέγιστον ὃ νῦν σποδός ἐστι}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. the living body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γενναῖος τῷ σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὔρωστος τὸ σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ σ. σῴζειν or -εσθαι save one's life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; διασῴζειν or -εσθαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ τοῦ σ. ἀγωνίζεσθαι for one's life, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔχειν τὸ σ. κακῶς, ὡς βέλτιστα, etc., to be…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σῶμα

soma

from 4982; the body (as a sound whole), used in a very wide

application, literally or figuratively:--bodily, body, slave.

see GREEK for 4982

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σῶμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

body, flesh

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σῶμα sōma 142x

the body of an animal; a living body, Mt. 5:29, 30; 6:22, 23, 25; Jas. 3:3; a person, individual, 1 Cor. 6:16; a dead body; corpse, carcass, Mt. 14:12; 27:52, 58; Heb. 13:11; the human body considered as the seat and occasion of moral imperfection, as inducing to sin through its appetites and passions, Rom. 7:24; 8:13; genr. a body, a material substance, 1 Cor. 15:37, 38, 40; the substance, reality, as opposed to ἡ σκιά, Col. 2:17; in NT…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σῶμα σῶμα, ατος, τό, deriv. uncertain the body of a man: in Hom. always the dead body, corpse, carcase, whereas the living body is δέμας.

the living body, Hes., Hdt., attic; τὸ ς. σώζειν or -εσθαι to save one's life, Dem., Thuc.; ἔχειν τὸ ς. κακῶς, ὡς βέλτιστα, to be in a bad, a good state of body, Xen.

body, as opp. to the soul (ψυχή), Plat., etc.; τὰ τοῦ ς. ἔργα bodily labours, Xen.; τὰ εἰς τὸ ς. τιμήματα bodily punishments, Aeschin.

periphr., ἀνθρώπου σῶμα ῀ ἄνθρωπος, Hdt.; esp. in Trag., σῶμα θηρός ῀ ὁ θήρ, Soph., etc.:—often of slaves, ς. αἰχμάλωτα Dem., etc

generally, a body, i. e. any material substance, Plat., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bod'-i:

I. PHILOLOGICAL:

Generally speaking, the Old Testament language employs no fixed term for the human body as an entire organism in exact opposition to "soul" or "spirit." Various terms were employed, each of which denotes only one part or element of the physical nature, such as "trunk," "bones," "belly," "bowels," "reins," "flesh," these parts being used, by synecdoche, for the whole: etsem = "bone," or "skeleton," hence, "body," is found in Ex 24:10 the King James Version; La 4:7; nephesh = "living organism" (Le 21:11; Nu 6:6,7,11; 19:11,13,16; Hag 2:13); nebhelah = "a flabby thing," "carcass" (

→ Called HOUSE 2Co 5:1

→ HOUSE OF CLAY Job 4:19

→ THE TEMPLE OF GOD 1Co 3:16; 6:3,15,19

→ Corruptible Job 17:14; 1Co 15:53,54

→ Resurrection of 1Co 15:19-54

→ See RESURRECTION

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%body
body90% · 130×bodies7% · 10×body?2% · 3×other renderings1% · 1×

144 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject29%adverbial29%object25%predicate17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 142 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνὅλοςall, the whole, εἰμίI am, exist
εἷςone
ἐνπολύςmuch, many, ofteπόρνηa prostitute
καίand, even, also, nam
ψυχήthe soul, life, ἐπουράνιοςheavenly, celestῥέδηa chariot
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theεἷςoneποῖοςIrg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
Article theσπέρμαseed, offspring
σῶμαbody,142×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusΧριστόςanointed, the Meἔνδυμαa garment, raime
σύ
φωτεινόςbright, luminousσκοτεινόςfull of darknessβάλλωI cast, throw, r
οὐNeg
οἶδαI know, rememberἐξουσιάζωI exercise authoπαρά
ἐγώ
πρόςεἰςArticle the
αὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐνArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσῶμα · 142× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Matthew Luke Romans 2 Corinthians Ephesians Colossians John Hebrews James Mark Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 50 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 30c. AD 40

τοσούτῳ γὰρ τὸ νοητὸν τοῦ ὁρατοῦ λαμπρότερόν τε καὶ αὐγοειδέστερον ὅσῳπερ ἥλιος, οἶμαι, σκότους καὶ ἡμέρα νυκτὸς καὶ [τὰ κριτήρια] νοῦς, ὁ τῆς ὅλης ψυχῆς ἡγεμών, ὀφθαλμῶν σώματος.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.60c. AD 75–95

οὐκ ἐπὶ νουθεσίᾳ δὲ τὴν κόλασιν ἔλαβεν, ἀλλʼ ἐπʼ αὐξήσει τῆς κακίας, ἡδονὴν μὲν πᾶσαν ἐκπορίζων αὐτοῦ τῷ σώματι, κἂν μεθʼ ὕβρεως τῶν συνόντων δέῃ ταύτην ἔχειν·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 6.2c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλος διωχθεῖσαι γυναῖκες Δαναΐδες καὶ Δίρκαι, αἰκίσματα δεινὰ καὶ ἀνόσια παθοῦσαι, ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς πίστεως βέβαιον δρόμον κατήντησαν καὶ ἔλαβον γέρας γενναῖον αἱ ἀσθενεῖς τῷ σώματι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς ὄνομα

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ ὧν ὀνόματα Μυρσίνην καὶ ταύτης … · τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ θηλυκὰ β αἷς

ἐγγαίων ὄντων δ ἔν τε τῶι Περιθήβας καὶ Παθυρίτηι, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Κόχλακος τῆς Ἀραβίας τοῦ δηλουμένου Παθυρίτου νομοῦ μέρους ἡμίσους

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
οὐκou not G3756 Particle · negative
1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Jude than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.
Tyndale gloss
no
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as ), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%not
not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός
ὅς
ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς
οὐnot1622×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐκArticle theἐγώ
μήNeg
παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe
οἶδαI know, remember
ὅτιthat, since, becArticle theτίςIrg
γάρfor
εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deArticle the
δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab
ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ἐτόλμησενtolmaō did dare G5111 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
16× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be bold or daring is the meaning of this word. In 2 Corinthians 10:2, it describes having the courage to take action or speak out.
Amplified meaning
dare, have the courage
Tyndale gloss
be bold
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τολμάω is a verb meaning to dare or be bold, derived from the concept of boldness. It encompasses the ideas of venturing, enduring, and taking courage, often followed by an infinitive. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in Mark 15:43, where it describes someone taking courage to enter a situation. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τολμάω, -ῶ

[in LXX: Jb 15:12 (לָקַח), Es 1:18 7:5 (לֵב מָלֵא) Jth 14:13, II Mac 4:2, III Mac 3:21 R, IV Mac 8:18 * ;]

to have courage, to venture, dare, be bold: absol, II Co 11:21; seq. ἐπί, II Co 10:2; c. inf. (Bl., § 69, 4), Mt 22:46, Mk 12:34, Lk 20:40, Jo 21:12, Ac 5:13 7:32, Ro 15:18, I Co 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τολμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐτόλμα, plur. ἐτόλμων; fut. τολμήσω; 1 aor. ἐτόλμησα; (τόλμα or τόλμῃ [‘daring’; Curtius § 236]); fr. Hom. down; to dare; a. not to dread or shun through fear: foll. by an inf., Mt xxii. 46; Mk. xii. 34; Lk. xx. 40; Jn. xxi. 12 [W. $65, 7b.]; Acts v. 13; vii. 32; Ro. xv. 18; 2Co.x.12; Phil. i.14; Jude 9; τολμήσας εἰσῆλθεν, took courage and went in, Mk. xv. 43 [Hdian. 8, 5, 22; Plut. vit. Cam. 22, 6]. Ὁ. to bear, endure; to bring one’s self to; [cf W. u.s.]: foll. by an inf., Ro. v. 7; 1 Co. vi. 1. ο. 8.050]. to be bold; bear one’s self boldly, deal boldly: 2Co. xi. 21; ἐπί twa, against one, 2 Co. x. 2. [CompP.: dro ToApdw. |

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τολμάω, “have courage,” “‘am bold”: P Par 2215 (Β.σ. 165) (= UPZ i. p. 193) μέχρι Tod νῦν οὐ τετόλμηκεν αὐτὸν ἡ Νέφορις θάψαι, BGU IV. 1209! (B.c. 23) ἵνα πρὸς μὲν κατάπληξιν τῶν τολμησάντων ἔχωμεν α[ὐτο]ὺς ἑτοίμους πρὸς ἐντυχίαν, P Ryl ΤΙ. 14.450 (A.D. 38) ἐτόλμησεν πθόνους (2. φθόνου) μοι ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, “ moreover he had the audacity to bring baseless accusations of malice against me” (Edd.), P Oxy VIII. 112015 (early iii/A.p.) εἰσεπήδησεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν μου καὶ ἐτόλμησεν ἀποσπάσαι δούλην μου, ‘rushed into my house and dared to carry off my slave” (Ed.), 76. IX. 12042 (A.p. 299) tts ᾽Οξυρυγχείτης . . . ὁρμώμενος τετόλμηκεν αὐτὸν ὀνομάζειν εἰς δεκαπρωτείαν, “4η Oxyrhynchite made a design upon him and ventured to nominate him for the decemprimate”’ (Ed.), and BGU III. 90918 (A.D. 359) ἐπὶ τοίνυν οὐχ ὀλίγ[α] ἐστὶν τὰ τολμηθέντα ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν kar’ ἐμοῦ. On τολμάω in the sense…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τολμάω (tolmaō) — be bold.

τολμ-άω,

Ionic dialect τολμέω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 2nd pers. singular τολμῇς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: future τολμήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect -ᾱσῶ[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: perfect τετόλμηκα [Refs 4th c.BC+], Doric dialect -ᾱκα[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—undertake, take heart either to do or bear anything terrible or difficult:

1. mostly absolutely, dare, endure, submit (see. Τλάω), ἐνὶ φρεσὶ θυμὸς ἐτόλμα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺ δ᾽ (i.e. κραδίη) ἐτόλμας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τολμῶντες ἄνδρες[Refs 6th c.BC+]participle, τολμήσας.. παρέστη he took courage and.., [NT+1st c.AD+]

2. with accusative of things, endure, undergo, τ. χρὴ τὰ διδοῦσι θεοί [Refs 6th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τολμάω

tolmao

from tolma (boldness; probably itself from the base of 5056 through

the idea of extreme conduct); to venture (objectively or in act; while

2292 is rather subjective or in feeling); by implication, to be

courageous:--be bold, boldly, dare, durst.

see GREEK for 5056

see GREEK for 2292

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τολμάω

v.

I dare, endure, am bold

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τολμάω tolmaō 16x

to assume resolution to do a thing, Mk. 15:43; Rom. 5:7; Phil. 1:14; to make up the mind, 2 Cor. 10:12; to dare, Acts 5:13; 7:32; to presume, Mt. 22:46; Mk. 12:34; Lk. 20:40; Jn. 21:12; Rom. 15:18; Jude 9; to have the face, 1 Cor. 6:1; absol. to assume a bold bearing…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τολμάω to undertake, take heart either to do or bear anything terrible or difficult, Hom., etc.:—absol. to hold out, endure, be patient, submit, id. Hom., attic:—c. acc. rei, to endure, undergo, Theogn., Eur.

c. inf. to have the courage, hardihood, effrontery, cruelty, or the grace, patience, to do a thing in spite of any natural feeling, to venture, dare to do, Hom., attic

sometimes c. part., ἐτόλμα βαλλόμενος he submitted to be struck, Od.; τόλμα ἐρῶσα Eur.

c. acc., τολμᾶν πόλεμον to undertake, venture on it, Od.; τοιαῦτα, πάντα τ. Trag.; also, τ. τὰ βέλτιστα Thuc.: Pass., οἷ᾽ ἐτολμήθη πατήρ such things as my father had dared (or done) against him, Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

dar: The expression "to dare" in the Scriptures never has the meaning of "to defy," "to challenge," or "to terrify." It is always found as the translation of tolmao, "to manifest courage." This is particularly evident from 2Co 10:12, "for we are not bold to number or compare ourselves" (the King James Version "for we dare not make ourselves of the number").

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
19%daring
daring19% · 3×dare13% · 2×he was daring6% · 1×would dare6% · 1×will i dare6% · 1×be daring6% · 1×dare we6% · 1×may be daring6% · 1×other renderings31% · 5×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb94%adverbial6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 16 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
γάρfor
οὐNegοὐκέτιNeg
οὐδείςno one, none, nothin
ἀριστάωI breakfast, dinλοιπόςleft, left behin
οὐNeg
ΜωϋσῆςMosesσῶμαbody, flesh
οὐδέNeg
λόγοςa word, speech,
οὐκέτιNeg
οὐδείςno one, none, no
τολμάωdid dare16×
what comes after →
τὶς
ἀπόλαλέωI speak, sayσύ
αὐτός
ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
πρός
ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, quest
αὐτός
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disci

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτολμάω · 16× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Acts Mark Romans 1 Corinthians John Jude Luke Matthew Philippians
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 26c. AD 40

πρεσβύτερον δ’ ἀποφαίνεσθαι τολμᾶν ἀφιλόσοφον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.155c. AD 75–95

πρῶτος οὖν τολμᾷ θεὸν ἀποφήνασθαι δημιουργὸν τῶν ὅλων ἕνα, τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν εἰ καί τι πρὸς εὐδαιμονίαν συντελεῖ κατὰ προσταγὴν τὴν τούτου παρέχειν ἕκαστον καὶ οὐ κατʼ οἰκείαν ἰσχύν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 30.8c. AD 96

θράσος καὶ αὐθάδεια καὶ τόλμα τοῖς κατηραμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ: ἐπιείκεια καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνη καὶ πραΰτης παρὰ τοῖς ηὐλογημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Ryl. 2 144Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 38

καὶ ἄσχημα καὶ ἐνειλούμενός μοι ἀπώλεσα πινακίδα καὶ ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ξ, ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἐτόλμησεν φθόνου μοι ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος. διὸ ἀξιῶ γράψαι ἀχθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐπὶ σὲ

P.Lond. 2 p. 167-169 no. 177Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 40

καὶ μηδενὸς αὐτῇ ἐπιβάλλοντος τῶν πατρικῶν καὶ μητρικῶν ἀκολούθως τῇ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν διαθήκῃ ἐτόλμησεν σὺν τῷ ἀνδρὶ αὐτῆς Πτολεμαίῳ Ὡρίωνος ἐξᾶραι τὰ πατρικὰ ἡμῶν ἔπιπλα καὶ σκεύη τὰ

P.Mich. 5 231ArsinoitesAD 48–AD 51

τοῖς συκοφαντιῶν καὶ ἐπιθέσεων ὑπὲρ ὧν ἕκαστος τῶν ἠδικημένων τὴν προέλευσιν πεποίηνται ἔτι καὶ ἐτόλμησεν ὁ αὐτὸς ἐνκαλούμενος τῆι περὶ ἑαυτὸν αὐθαδείᾳ χρώμενος ἐκδιῶξαι ἕτερον τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
κρίσινkrisis a judgment G2920 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
47× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Judgment refers to a decision or verdict, often from God. In John 3:19 and 2 Thessalonians 1:5, it means divine judgment, where God evaluates people's actions and renders a verdict.
Amplified meaning
accusation, judgment
Tyndale gloss
judgment
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κρίσις (krisis) is derived from the verb κρίνω (krinō), meaning to judge or decide. It encompasses a range of meanings, including judgment, decision, and trial, often in a legal or divine context. In the New Testament, it refers to both human and divine judgment, with specific mentions in John and Matthew regarding the last judgment. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κρίσις, -εως, ἡ

(< κρίνω),

[in LXX chiefly for מִשְׁפָּט, also for רִיב, etc.;]

a seperating, selection (Arist., al.)

a decision, judgment (cl.): Jo 8:16, I Ti 5:24, II Pe 2:11, Ju 9; κ. κρίνειν, Jo 7:24; in forensic sense, Ac 8:33(LXX) (v. Page, in l.); esp. of the Divine judgment, Jo 3:19 5:24, 27, 29, 30 12:31 16:8, 11, II Th 1:5, He 10:27, Ja 2:13 5:12, II Pe 2:4, Re 18:10; pl., Re 16:7 19:2; of the last judgment,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κρίσις, -ews, 7, Sept. for 11, 32) (a suit), but chiefly for τ: in Grk. writ. [(fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down) ] 1. a separating, sundering, separation; a trial, contest. 2. selection. 3. judgment; i. e. opinion or decision given concerning anything, esp. concerning justice and injustice, right and wrong; a. univ.: Jn. viii. 16; 1 Tim. v. 24 (on which see ἐπακολουθέων; Jude 9; 2 Pet. ii. 11; κρίσιν κρίνειν (see κρίνω, 5 b.), Jn. vii. 24. b. in a forensic sense, of the judgment of God or of Jesus the Messiah: univ., Jas. ii. 13; 2 Th.i.5; Heb. x. 27; plur., Rev. xvi.7; xix.2; of the last judgment: Heb. ix. 27; ἡ ἡμέρα κρίσεως [ Mt. x. 15; xi. 22,24; xii.36; Mk. vi.11 RL in br.; 2 Pet. ii. 9; iii. 7] or τῆς κρίσεως [1 Jn. iv. 17], the day appointed for the judgment, see ἡμέρα, 3; εἰς κρίσιν μεγάλης ἡμέρας, Jude 6; ἡ ὥρα τῆς κρίσεως αὐτοῦ, i.e. τοῦ θεοῦ, Rey. xiv. 7; ἐν τῇ κρίσει, at the time…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κρίσις in the sense of ‘‘judging,” ‘‘trial,” is found in such passages as PST IT. 173}? (ii/B.c.) κα[τὰ προε]νεστῶσαν . . ἐπὶ σοῦ κρίσιν, P Oxy IX. 1203” (late i/A.D.) where certain petitioners ask that no step be taken against them μέχρι κρίσεως, ‘before the trial of the case,” the curious mantic P Ryl I. 28 7% (iv/A.p.) σφυρὸν εὐώνυμον ἐὰν ἅληται ἐν κρίσει βαρη[θ]εὶς ἔσται καὶ ἐκφεύξεται, ‘if the left ankle quiver, he will be burdened with a trial, and will be acquitted ” (Edd.), and OGZS 6695 (i/a.D.) eis κρίσιν ἄγεσθαι. From this it is an easy transition to the result of the judging, **judgement,”’ “decision,” e.g. P Petr III. 26° (iii/B.c.) ἐκ κρίσεως, ‘in accordance with a legal decision,” P Oxy I. 68% (A.D. 131) οὖσαν δ ἐμοὶ τὴν πρὸς αὐτὸν κρίσιν, “‘judgement against him being entered in my favour’’ (Edd.), P Ryl IL. 78% (A.D. 157) περὶ ἀπολογισμοῦ κρίσεων, ‘ concerning the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κρίσις (krisis) — judgment.

κρίσις [ῐς], εως, ἡ,

(κρίνω) separating, distinguishing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῶν ὁμοιογενῶν, τῶν διαφερόντων, uncertain reading in [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. decision, judgement, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. οὐκ ἀληθής no certain means of judging, [Refs 5th c.BC+] K.; Κρίσις, title of a play by Sophocles on the Judgemént of Paris; κ. τινός judgement on or respecting, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: ἡ τῶν ὅπλων κ., referring to the story of Ajax, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; κ. συνετή [Refs]; power of judgement, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; κατὰ κρίσιν with judgement, advisedly, [Refs]

3. choice, election, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

4. interpretation of dreams or portents, [LXX+1st c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κρίσις

krisis

decision (subjectively or objectively, for or against); by

extension, a tribunal; by implication, justice (especially, divine

law):--accusation, condemnation, damnation, judgment.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κρίσις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

judging, divine judgment

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κρίσις krisis 47x

pr. distinction; discrimination; judgment, decision, award, Jn. 5:30; 7:24; 8:16; a judicial sentence, Jn. 3:19; Jas. 2:13; an adverse sentence, Mt. 23:33; Mk. 3:29; judgment, judicial process, trial, Mt. 10:15; Jn. 5:24; 12:31; 16:8; judgment, administration of justice, Jn. 5:22, 27; in NT a court of justice, tribunal, Mt. 5:21, 22; an impeachment, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κρίσις κρί^σις, εως κρίνω a separating, power of distinguishing, Arist.: choice, selection, id. Arist.

a decision, judgment, Hdt., Aesch.; κρ. οὐκ ἀληθής no certain means of judging, Soph.

in legal sense, a trial, Ar., Thuc., etc.:— the result of a trial, condemnation, Xen.

a trial of skill, τόξου in archery, Soph.

a dispute, περί τινος Hdt.

the event or issue of a thing, κρίσιν ἔχειν to be decided, of a war, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Is put, in Mt 5:21,22, for a court of judgment, a tribunal, namely, the tribunal of seven judges, which Josephus mentions as existing in every city, and which decided causes of minor importance. See under SYNAGOGUE.

For the expression, "judgment-hall," see PRETORIUM.

THE DAY OF JUDGMENT, for which the word "judgment" alone is sometimes used, is that great day, at the end of the world and of time, when Christ shall sit as judge over all the universe, and when every individual of the human race will be judged and recompensed according to his works, whether they be good or evil. The time of its coming and its duration are known only to God. It will break upon the world suddenly, and with a glorious but awful majesty. It will witness the perfect vindication of all the ways of God. The revelation of his justice, appalling but unstained…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ THE GENERAL 1Ch 16:33; Job 14:17; 21:30; 31:13-15; Ps 9:7; 50:3-6; 96:13; 98:9; Ec 3:17; 11:9; 12:14; Eze 18:20-28; Da 7:9,10; Am 4:12; Mt 3:12; 7:22,23; 8:29; 10:15; 11:22; 12:36,37,41,42; 13:30,40-43,49,50; 16:27; 22:11-13; 23:14; 25:1-46; Mr 4:22; 8:38; 13:32; Lu 3:17; 10:10-14; 11:31,32; 12:2-5; 13:24-29; 19:12-26; 20:45-47;

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 158 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.6c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ ἄλογον αἴσθησίς ἐστι καὶ τὰ ταύτης ἔκγονα πάθη, καὶ μάλιστα εἰ μὴ κρίσεις εἰσὶν ἡμέτεραι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.232c. AD 75–95

Ἴσακος δέ, πατρὸς γὰρ ἦν οἵου τετυχηκότα γενναῖον ἔδει τὸ φρόνημα εἶναι, δέχεται πρὸς ἡδονὴν τοὺς λόγους καὶ φήσας, ὡς οὐδὲ γεγονέναι τὴν ἀρχὴν ἦν δίκαιος, εἰ θεοῦ καὶ πατρὸς μέλλει κρίσιν ἀπωθεῖσθαι καὶ μὴ παρέχειν αὑτὸν τοῖς ἀμφοτέρων βουλήμασιν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.6c. AD 100

Τρία οὖν δόγματά ἐστιν κυρίου: ζωῆς ἐλπίς, ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος πίστεως ἡμῶν: καὶ δικαιοσύνη, κρίσεως ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος: ἀγάπη εὐφροσύνης καὶ ἀγαλλιάσεως ἔργων δικαιοσύνης μαρτυρία.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD
P.Fam.Tebt. 19ArsinoitesAD 118

τῆς γῆς οἱ ὑπόχρεοι. Διηρᾶς· μὴ ἵνα πάλιν τοὺς καρποὺς βαστάσωσι μετὰ τὴν σὴν κρίσιν. Κρονίων· δαπάνας ἐποιήσαμεν. Ἀπολωνίδης ὁ στρατηγός· ὁ κωμογραμματεὺς ἐπικρινεῖ πόσαι ἐγένοντο δαπάναι καὶ ταύτας

P.Lond. 2 p. 206-207 no. 298Ptolemais Euergetis (ArsinoitesAD 124

τὸν ὁμολογοῦντα Πρῖμον ἀποδώσειν τῷ Ἡρακλείδῃ ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν αὐτὸς Ἡρακλείδης αἱρῆται ἄνευ δίκης καὶ κρίσεως καὶ πάσης ὑπερθέσεως καὶ εὑρησιλογίας ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτισάτω τῶι Ἡρακλείδῃ

P.Mert. 3 117ArsinoitesAD 140

παρε … … … εἰς ἀναγκαιότερα μεταπεριεσπώμην. ὁ κριτής· ἀναγινώσκετε ἃς λέγει ἔχειν κρίσεις. καὶ ἀναγνόντων αἰλίου Νουμισιανοῦ στρατηγοῦ ὑπομνηματισμοὺς ἕνα μὲν κεχρονισμένον ἐπὶ τοῦ δ ἔτους Ἀντωνίνου

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ἐπενεγκεῖνepipherō to bring against [him] G2018 Verb · second aorist · active · infinitive
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To inflict or adduce something, as in Romans 3:5, where it refers to imposing a judgment or penalty. This word can also mean to bring or take something, often in a judicial context.
Tyndale gloss
to inflict
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιφέρω (i.e., *epipherō*) combines the elements of 'upon' and 'to bear.' It encompasses a range of meanings, including to bring upon, inflict, impose, or add to something. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as imposing judgment (Jude 9) and inflicting consequences (Romans 3:5). The lexicons do not present significant disagreements on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-φέρω

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁלַח ;]

to bring upon or against: κρίσιν, Ju 9.

to impose, inflict: Ro 3:5.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-φέρω ; [impf. ἐπέφερον); 2 aor. inf. ἐπενεγκεῖν; [pres. pass. ἐπιφέρομαι} ; 1. to bring upon, bring forward : αἰτίαν, of accusers (as in Hdt. 1, 26, and in Attic writ. fr. Thue. down; Polyb. 5, 41, 3; 40, 5,2; Joseph. antt. 2, 6, 7; 4, 8, 23; Hdian. 3, 8, 13 (6 ed. Bekk.)), Acts xxv. 18 (where LT Tr WH ἔφερον) ; κρίσιν, Jude 9. 2. to lay upon, to inflict: τὴν ὀργήν, Ro. iii. 5 (πληγήν, Joseph. antt. 2, 14, 2). 3. to bring uponi.e. in addition, to add, increase: θλίψιν τοῖς δεσμοῖς, Phil. i. 16 (17) Ree., but on this pass. see ἐγείρω, 4 ¢.; (πῦρ ἐπιφέρειν πυρί, Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 18; [ef. W. § 52, 4, 7]). 4. to put upon, cast upon, impose, (φάρμακον, Plat. ep. 8 p. 354 b.): τὶ ἐπί τινα, in pass., Acts xix. 12, where L T Tr WH ἀποφέρεσθαι, q.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιφέρω (epipherō) — to inflict.

ἐπιφέρω,

future ἐποίσω: aorist 1 ἐπήνεγκα: aorist 2 ἐπήνεγκον: [Refs 4th c.AD+] aorist 1 subjunctive 3rd.pers. singular ἐποίση [Refs] —passive, future ἐποισθήσεται· ἐπενεχθήσεται, [Refs 5th c.AD+]:—bring, put or lay upon, σοὶ..βαρείας χεῖρας ἐποίσει will lay heavy hands upon thee, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and in Prose, ἐ. τινὶ πόλεμον make war upon him, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐ. τὸ διάφορόν τισι to bring discord upon them, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐ. δίκην, τιμωρίαν τινί, [Refs 5th c.BC+] if you shall pursue your attack thus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__b inflict, πληγήν, πληγάς τινι, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; vent, ὀργήν [NT]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιφέρω

epiphero

from 1909 and 5342; to bear upon (or further), i.e. adduce (personally

or judicially (accuse, inflict)), superinduce:--add, bring (against),

take.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 5342

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιφέρω

v.

I bring forward against

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιφέρω epipherō 2x

to bring upon or against, Jude 9; to inflict, Rom. 3:5*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιφέρω fut. ἐποίσω aor1 ἐπήνεγκα aor2 ἐπήνεγκον to bring, put or lay upon, τί τινι Il., etc.; ἐπιφέρειν τινὶ πόλεμον, Lat. bellum inferre, to make war upon him, Hdt., attic; so, ἐπ. δόρυ Aesch., etc.:— absol. to attack, assail, Ar.

to bring offerings to the grave, Thuc.

to bring as a charge against, Hdt., attic; so, ἐπ. μωρίην, μανίην τινί to impute it to him, Hdt., etc.

to confer or impose upon, in good or bad sense, Thuc.

to add to, increase, id. Thuc.

Mid. to bring with or upon oneself, bring as dowry, Dem.

Pass. to rush upon or after, attack, assault, Il., Hdt., attic

to be borne onwards, Hdt.

to come after or next, ensue, τὰ ἐπιφερόμενα coming events, id. Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAN — Verb · second aorist · active · infinitive
second aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5629

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%inflicting
inflicting50% · 1×bring against50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
κρίσιςjudging, divine judg
τολμάωI dare, endure,
ἐπιφέρωto bring against [him]
what comes after →
Article the
ὀργήanger, wrath, pa
βλασφημίαabusive or scurrilou
ἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπιφέρω · 2× in the New Testament
Jude Romans
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.181c. AD 40

δοκεῖς μὲν γὰρ τὰ ἀγωγὰ πρὸς εὐφροσύνην εὐτρεπίζεσθαι, τὸ δ’ ἀληθὲς ἀφροσύνης καὶ ἀκολασίας ἐξάπτεις φλόγα, πολλὴν αὐτῇ καὶ ἄφθονον ἐπιφέρων ὕλην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.96c. AD 75–95

Νῶχος δὲ φοβούμενος, μὴ καθʼ ἕκαστον ἔτος ἐπικλύζῃ τὴν γῆν ὁ θεὸς φθορὰν ἀνθρώπων καταψηφισάμενος, ἱερὰ καύσας ἐδεῖτο τὸν θεὸν τοῦ λοιποῦ ἐπὶ τῆς πρώτης μένειν εὐταξίας καὶ μηδὲν ἔτι τοιοῦτον ἐπενεγκεῖν πάθος, ὑφʼ οὗ κινδυνεύσει πᾶν ἀπολέσθαι τὸ τῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD

τὴν διαθήκην ταύτην ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἐπέρχεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄκυρον ἔστω καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπιφέρων ὕστερον … ἄλλον τῆς αυ … ἐπιτίμου παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ τάλαντα … καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσι

P.Oxy. Hels. 36OxyrhynchosAD 167

τὸν μὲν τόκον κατὰ μῆνα, τῆς πίστεως περὶ σὲ οὔσης περὶ ὧν ἐὰν μὴ ἐπιφέρω σοι γράμματα, τὸ δὲ κεφάλαιον τριακάδι Μεσορὴ τοῦ εἰσιόντος ἐνάτου ἔτους Ἀντωνίνου καὶ Οὐήρου

Stud.Pal. 20 14ArsinoitesAD 188

μερίδων· τῇ β τοῦ Ἐπὶφ μηνὸς τοῦ διεληλυθότος κζ ἔτους· ἐπεὶ οὖν ὑπογύως ἐτελεύτησεν, ἐπιφέρων τὴν δηλουμένην διαθήκην ὑπογραφόντων πλειόνων τῶν ἐνγεγραμμένων μαρτύρων ἐπιδίδωμι εἰς τὸ τὴν λύσιν γενέσθαι

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
βλασφημίαςblasphēmia blasphemy G988 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Blasphemy refers to speaking badly of God or others, as seen in Matthew 12:31 and Revelation 2:9. It involves slander or railing against someone, often in a hurtful manner. This term is used to describe serious offenses against God or others.
Amplified meaning
railing, blasphemous
Tyndale gloss
blasphemy
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βλασφημία (i.e., *blasphemia*) refers to slander or abusive speech, particularly against God, known as blasphemy. It is derived from βλάσφημος and encompasses a range of derogatory expressions, including defamation and irreverent remarks. The New Testament cites it in various contexts, such as Matthew 12:31 and Mark 3:28, highlighting its serious implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βλασφημία, -ας, ἡ

(< βλάσφημος),

[in LXX: Ez 35:12 (נֶאָצָה), Da TH 3:29 (96) (שׁלה), To 1:18, I Mac 2:6, II Mac 8:4 10:35 15:24 * ;]

railing slander: Mt 12:31 15:19, Mk 3:28 7:22, Eph 4:31, Col 3:8, I Ti 6:4, Ju 9, Re 2:9;

spec., impious speech against God, blasphemy: Mt 26:65, Mk 14:64, Lk 5:21, Jo 10:33, Re 13:5; ὄνομα…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βλασφημία, -as, 9, railing, reviling, (Vulg. blasphemia) ; a. univ. slander, detraction, speech injurious to another’s good name : Mt. xii. 31; xv. 19; Mk. iii. 28; vii. 22; Eph. iv. 31; Col. iii. 8; 1 Tim. vi. 4; Jude 9 (κρίσις βλασφημίας, i. 4. κρίσις βλάσφημος in 2 Pet. ii. 11, a judgment pronounced in reproachful terms); Rev.ii.9. ὍὌ. specifically, impious and reproachful speech injurious to the divine majesty: Mt. xxvi. 65; Mk. ii. 7 [RG]; xiv. 64; Lk. v. 21; Jn. x. 33; Rev. xiii. 5 [not Lehm.]; ὄνομα or ὀνόματα βλασφημίας i. q. βλάσφημα (cf. W. § 34, 3 b.; [B. § 132, 10]): Rev. xiii. 1; xvii. 3 [RG Tr, see γέμω]; τοῦ πνεύματος, gen. οὗ obj., Mt. xii. 31; πρὸς τὸν θεόν, Rev. xiii. 6. (Eur., Plat., Dem., al.; for ΠΣ), Ezek. xxxv. 12.) [BB.DD. 5. ν. Blasphemy; Campbell, Diss. on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βλασφημία (blasphēmia) — blasphemy.

βλασφημ-ία, ἡ,

word of evil omen, profane speech, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; βλασφημίαν ἐφθέγξατο, at a sacrifice, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. defamation, slander, [NT+4th c.BC+]; ὅλας ἁμάξας βλασφημιῶν whole cart-loads of abuse, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

3. irreverent speech against God, blasphemy, ἡ εἰς τὸ θεῖον β. [LXX+4th c.BC+]against.., [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βλασφημία

blasphemia

from 989; vilification (especially against God):--blasphemy, evil

speaking, railing.

see GREEK for 989

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βλασφημία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

abusive or scurrilous language, blasphemy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βλασφημία blasphēmia 18x

slander, railing, reproach, Mt. 15:19; Mk. 7:22; blasphemy, Mt. 12:31; 26:65

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βλασφημία From βλάσφημος a profane speech, opp. to εὐφημία, Eur., Plat.

defamation, evil-speaking, slander, Dem.

impious and irreverent speech against God, blasphemy, NTest.; τοῦ πνεύματος against the Spirit, id. NTest.; πρός τινα id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

blas'-fe-mi (blasphemia): In classical Greek meant primarily "defamation" or "evil-speaking" in general; "a word of evil omen," hence, "impious, and irreverent speech against God."

(1) In the Old Testament as substantive and vb.:

(a) (barakh) "Naboth did blaspheme God and the king" (1Ki 21:10,13 the King James Version);

(b) (gadhaph) of Senna-cherib defying Yahweh (2Ki 19:6,22 = Isa 37:6,23; also Ps 44:16; Eze 20:27; compare Nu 15:30), "But the soul that doeth aught with a high hand (i.e. knowingly and defiantly), .... the same blasphemeth (so the Revised Version…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Blasphemy

In the sense of speaking evil of God this word is found in Ps. 74:18; Isa. 52:5; Rom. 2:24; Rev. 13:1, 6; 16:9, 11, 21. It denotes also any kind of calumny, or evil-speaking, or abuse (1 Kings 21:10; Acts 13:45; 18:6, etc.). Our Lord was accused of blasphemy when he claimed to be the Son of God (Matt. 26:65; comp. Matt. 9:3; Mark 2:7). They who deny his Messiahship blaspheme Jesus (

in its technical English sense, signifies the speaking evil of God and in this sense it is found (Psalms 74:18; Isaiah 52:5; Romans 2:24) etc. But according to its derivation it may mean any species of calumny and abuse: see (1 Kings 21:10; Acts 18:6; Jude 1:9) etc. Blasphemy was punished by stoning, which was inflicted on the son of Shelomith. (Leviticus 24:11) On this charge both our Lord and St. Stephen were condemned to death by the Jews. The blasphemy against the Holy Ghost, (Matthew 12:32;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
44%blasphemy
blasphemy44% · 8×slander28% · 5×blasphemies17% · 3×slanders6% · 1×blasphemies?6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%subject39%adverbial11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀκούωI hear, listenκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
ἁμαρτίαa sinκραυγήa shout, clamor,μέγας
ὄνομαname, character, rep
αὐτόςγέμωI am full of
πνεῦμαwind, breath, spirit
Article the
ψευδομαρτυρίαfalse testimony
κλοπήthieving, theft
βλασφημίαblasphemy18×
what comes after →
τίςIrg
σύδύναμαιI am powerful, a
καίand, even, also, nam
ὅτιthat, since, becδίδωμιI offer, give
ἀφίημιI send away, release
Article the
οὐNeg
ἀφίημιI send away, rel
ὅσος
ἐάνCond

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβλασφημία · 18× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Mark 1 Timothy Colossians Ephesians John Jude Luke
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Didache Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 117c. AD 40

μηδὲν οὖν μήτε τῶν εἰς εὐλογίας καὶ εὐχὰς μήτε τῶν εἰς βλασφημίας καὶ κατάρας ἐπὶ τὰς ἐν προφορᾷ διεξόδους ἀναφερέσθω μᾶλλον ἢ διάνοιαν, ἀφ’ ἧς ὥσπερ ἀπὸ πηγῆς ἑκάτερον εἶδος τῶν λεχθέντων δοκιμάζεται.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.180c. AD 75–95

εἰ γάρ τις τῆς σκηνῆς κατανοήσειε τὴν πῆξιν καὶ τοῦ ἱερέως ἴδοι τὴν στολὴν τά τε σκεύη, οἷς περὶ τὴν ἱερουργίαν χρώμεθα, τόν τε νομοθέτην εὑρήσει θεῖον ἄνδρα καὶ ματαίως ἡμᾶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἄλλων τὰς βλασφημίας ἀκούοντας·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 47.7c. AD 96

καὶ αὕτη ἡ ἀκοὴ οὐ μόνον εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐχώρησεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἑτεροκλινεῖς ὑπάρχοντας ἀφ̓ ἡμῶν, ὥστε καὶ βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀνόματι κυρίου διὰ τὴν ὑμετέραν ἀφροσύνην, ἑαυτοῖς δὲ κίνδυνον ἐπεξεργάζεσθαι.

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ἀλλ᾽alla but G235 Conjunction
638× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
But is a strong opposing word, used in Matthew 5:15 and John 7:16. It shows contrast or surprise, like in the phrase 'but God' in Romans 3:31.
Tyndale gloss
but
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλά (alla) is an adversative particle, meaning 'but' or 'otherwise.' It is derived from the neuter plural of ἄλλος and is used to introduce opposition or contrast in sentences. In the New Testament, it often appears in contexts that involve negation or exceptions, such as in Matthew 5:15 and John 16:2. The lexicons note its stronger adversative force compared to δέ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλά (ἀλλ’ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146),

adversative particle,

stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Ro 3:31);

opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mt 5:15, 17 Mk 5:39, Jo 7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mk 9:37, Mt 10:20, Jo 12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mt 11:7-9

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Dévar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things se. than those just mentioned. It differs from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [ef. W. 441 sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to concessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; xe 29: 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. with καί added, Lk. xii. 7…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀλλά. The closeness οἱ ἀλλά to πλήν appears in more uses than one. Armitage Robinson, Zp/estans, p. 205, has a note on a quasi-resumpltive use of ἀλλά in Eph 524 which is closely paralleled by that of πλήν in ver. 33. Then there are instances of ἀλλά = ‘‘except.” ‘This is clear where we have ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (as in 2 Cor 13%): thus P Petr 11. 9 (3)® (B.c. 24139) ὥστε μηθένα εἶναι ἐνταῦθα ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἡμᾶς, ‘ There is no one left here except ourselves” (Ed.), 2d. 46 (α)" (B.C. 209) καὶ μὴ ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἄλλο μηδὲν add’ ἢ τὴν mpoyeypap[μέν]ην ἐγγύην, “has not been pledged for any other purpose than the aforesaid security” (1α.), P Lond 89738 (a.p. 84) (=TIII. p. 207) ὃ μέντοιγε οὐ θέλων. ἀλλὰ ἢ ἀνάγκηι. In P Tebt I. το 419 (B.c. 92) μὴ ἐξέστω Φιλίσκωι γυναῖκα ἄλλην. μ γυ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλά (alla) — but.

ἀλλά,

conjunction, originally neuter plural of ἄλλος, otheruise: used adversatively to limit or oppose words, sentences, or clauses, stronger than δέ:

I. in simple oppositions, but,

I.1. after negative clauses, οὐ κακός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγαθός[Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. b after a simple negative, ἦ παραφρονεῖ; οὔκ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπνος μ᾽ ἔχει[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. c frequently after οὐ μόνον, μὴ μόνον, with or without καί, οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀ. πολλάκις[Refs 5th c.BC+], either, not only.. but.., μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινά, ἀλλὰ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; or, not only not.. but.., οὐχ ὅπως κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. περιόψεσθε[Refs 5th c.BC+]; the negative form is ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, μὴ ὅτι ὑπὲρ ἄλλου, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ὑπὲρ ἐμαυτοῦ δίκην εἴρηκα[Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλά

alla

neuter plural of 243; properly, other things, i.e. (adverbially)

contrariwise (in many relations):--and, but (even), howbeit, indeed,

nay, nevertheless, no, notwithstanding, save, therefore, yea, yet.

see GREEK for 243

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλά

Cj.

but, except

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλά alla 638x

but; however; but still more; ἀλλάγε, at all events; ἀλλή, unless, except. Ἀλλά also serves to introduce a sentence with keenness and emphasis, Jn. 16:2; Rom. 6:5; 7:7; Phil. 3:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλά Conjunct., properly neut. pl. of ἄλλος (with changed accent) otherwise, but, stronger than δέ:

to oppose single clauses, but, Lat. autem, the preceding clause being negat., οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις Plat.; so, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅτι, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅπως, are followed by ἀλλά or ἀλλά καὶ . . . , not only . . . , but . . .

after a negative ἀλλά sometimes = ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, except, but, ἔπαισεν οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ Soph.

to oppose whole sentences, but, yet, Lat. at:— used by Hom., with imperat. or subj., to remonstrate, encourage, persuade, like Lat. tandem, ἀλλ᾽ ἴθι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε, ἀλλὰ ἴωμεν, Hom.

joined with other Particles, ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα, or, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but then, however, Hdt., etc.

ἀλλὰ γάρ, Lat. enimvero, but really, certainly, attic

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%but
but92% · 591×instead2% · 15×other renderings4% · 25×other renderings2% · 12×

643 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial10%object6%predicate3%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 638 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
οἶδαI know, rememberκατεργάζομαιI work out, prodἐπιγινώσκωI come to know,
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγράφωI writeἐν
ἐγώ
ἀπόκρατέωI lay hold of, oθέλημαwill, wish, desi
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegοὐδείςno one, none, noΜωϋσῆςMoses
θεόςGod, a god
Article theἄνομοςlawless, sinful,
ἀλλάbut638×
what comes after →
Article the
Article theπέμπωI sendθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἐν
οὐNeg
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἐν
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theδύναμιςmight, power, ma
ἵναin order that, so th
φανερόωI make clear, viπληρόωI fill, fulfill,σῴζωI save, heal

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλά · 638× in the New Testament
John 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Mark Matthew Luke Acts Galatians 1 Peter Hebrews Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτους ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος, ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτει ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
εἶπεν·legō said; G2036 Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
1,988× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἶπον (eipon) — to say.

εἶπον

(present ἔπω is used by [Refs 2nd c.BC+]present in use is φημί, λέγω, ἀγορεύω (see. infr. IV), the future ἐρέω, ἐρῶ, the perfect εἴρηκα), Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἔειπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive εἴπω (Epic dialect εἴπωμι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative εἴποιμ; infinitive εἰπεῖν, Epic dialect -έμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs]; participle εἰπών: also aorist 1 εἶπα (ἔειπα [Refs 5th c.BC+] as I said, [Refs 1st c.BC+] mostly in Ionic dialect Prose, also [Refs 4th c.BC+], and the 2nd pers. indicative and imperative of this form are preferred in Attic dialect, 2nd pers. singular indicative εἶπας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; imperative εἶπον (on the accent see[Refs 5th c.BC+], -ατον, -ατ; 3rd.pers. plural εἶπαν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; participle εἴπας [Refs 4th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect εἴπαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in compounds middle ἀπείπασθαι (which see), διείπασθαι (which see)…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

epo

a primary verb (used only in the definite past tense, the others being

borrowed from 2046, 4483, and 5346); to speak or say (by word or

writing):--answer, bid, bring word, call, command, grant, say (on),

speak, tell. Compare 3004.

see GREEK for 2046

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 3004

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔπω εἶπον prob. made up by Nicander as present of εἶπον. to say, Nicander.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
39%said
said39% · 372×he said27% · 260×they said7% · 67×having said4% · 40×other renderings15% · 143×other renderings8% · 73×

955 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 73 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
ἐπιτιμήσαιepitimaō Would [that] he rebuke G2008 Verb · aorist · active · optative · third person · singular
30× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
It means to rebuke or warn someone, like in Matthew 8:26 where Jesus rebukes the storm.
Amplified meaning
warn, reprove
Tyndale gloss
to rebuke
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιτιμάω (i.e., *epitimao*) is built from the prefix ἐπι- and the root τιμάω. It covers a range of meanings including to honor, to raise in price, and primarily to censure or rebuke. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts where Jesus admonishes or rebukes, such as in Matthew 19:13 and Luke 23:40.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἐπιτιμάω, ἐλέγχω, αἰτία, ἔλεγχοΞ from a scan

OnE may ‘rebuke’ another without bringing the rebuked to a conviction of any fault on his part; and this, either because there was no fault, and the rebuke was therefore unneeded or unjust; or else because, though there was such fault, the rebuke was ineffectual to bring the offender to own it; and in this possibility of ‘rebuking’ for sin, without ‘ convincing’ of sin, lies the distinction between these two words. In ἐπιτιμᾶν lies simply the notion of rebuking ; which word can therefore be used of one unjustly checking or blaming another; in this sense Peter ‘began to rebuke’ his Lord (ἤρξατο ἐπιτιμᾶν, Matt. xvi. 22; cf. xix. 13; Luke xviii. 39):—or ineffectually, and without any profit to the person rebuked, who is not thereby brought to see his sin; as when the penitent robber ‘rebuked ’ (ἐπετίμα) his fellow malefactor (Luke xxiii. 40; cf. Mark ix. 25). But ἐλέγχειν is a much more…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-τιμάω, -ῶ

[in LXX for גָּעַר, Ge 37:10, Ps 9:5, Za 3:3(2); Si 11:7, al. ;]

to honour.

to raise in price

to mete out due measure;

to award;

to censure, rebuke, admonish: absol., II Ti 4:2; c. dat., Mt 8:26 17:13 19:13, Mk 4:39 8:32 10:13, Lk 4:39, 41 8:24 9:21, 42, 55 17:3 18:15 19:39, Ju 9; seq. ἵνα, Mt 12:16 16:20 20:31, Mk 3:12 8:30 10:48, Lk 18:39; seq. λέγων, λέγει, etc.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-τιμάω, -@; impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπετίμα, 3 pers. plur. ἐπετίμων; 1 aor. ἐπετίμησα; Sept. for 11; in Grk. writ. 1. to show honor to, to honor: twa, Hdt. 6, 39. 2. to raise the price of: 6 σῖτος ἐπετιμήθη, Dem. 918, 22; al. 3. to adjudge, award, (fr. τιμή in the sense of merited penalty): τὴν δίκην, Hat. 4, 43. 4. to tax with fault, rate, chide, rebuke, reprove, censure severely, (so Thue., Xen., Plato, Dem., al.) : absol. 2 Tim. iv. 2; τινί, charge one with wrong, Lk. [ix. 55]; xvii. 3; xxiii. 40; to rebuke —in order to curb one’s ferocity or violence (hence many formerly gave the word the meaning to restrain; against whom cf. Fritzsche on Matt. p. 325), Mt. Vili. 26; xvii. 18; Mk. iv. 39; Lk. iv. 39,41; viii. 24; ix. 42; Jude 9 [where Rec. strangely ἐπιτιμῆσαι (1 aor. act. inf.) for -unoa (opt. 3 pers. sing.)]; or to keep one away from another, Mt. xix. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; Mk. x. 13…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιτιμάω = ‘‘censure,” ‘‘ lay under a penalty,” as notably in Mk (see Allen ad Mk 839), may be illustrated from P Magd 245 B.C. 218) ἀγανακτήσαντος δέ pov Kal ἐπιτιμῶντος avt[ Ht, P Par 427 (B.C. 156) μεταπεμψάμενος οὖν αὐτὸν Kal τὸν φυλακίτην ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ, P Oxy X. 12959 (ii/iii A.D.) ἐὰν δὲ μέλλῃς οὕτω αὐτῷ ἐπιτιμᾶν, and Sy// 177° (B.C. 303) Strw]s, ἐάν τινες φαίνωνται μὴ τὰ βέλτιστα νομογραφοῦντες, ἀλλ᾽ [ἀνεπιτήδεια, αὐτοῖς] ἐπιτιμῶμεν καὶ ζημιῶμεν. In PSI IV. 3567 (B.C. 253-2) ἐπιτετίμηται is used of χόρτος that has been ‘‘augmented” in price. For ἐπιτιμή = “ penalty,” “fine,” see P Petr III. 20 versoii-5 (B.c. 246) τὰς ἐπιτιμὰς eis τὸ βασιλικ[ό]ν, and for the corresponding use of τὸ ἐπίτιμον, see P Gen I. 201° (ii/B.c.) προσαποτισάτω ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα, P Oxy II. 27528 (a.p. 66) (= Selections, p. 57) ἐπίτειμον δραχμὰς ἑκατόν, 7). X. 128249 (A.p. 83) τό τε βλάβος kal ἐπίτειμον…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιτιμάω (epitimaō) — to rebuke.

ἐπιτιμ-άω,

Ionic dialect and Delph. ἐπιτιμέω, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:— lay a value upon: hence,

1. show honour to, τινά Hdt. [prev. cited]

2. raise in price, οἶνον ἐ. πολύ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὴν αἴτησιν ἐ. raise the demand, [Refs]:—passive, rise in price, of corn, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. of judges, lay a penalty on a person, τοῖς ἐξάρνοις ἐ. ταλάντου ἑκάστῳ variant in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but ἐ. τὴν ἀρχαίην δίκην make the original trial the ground of punishment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. object to one as blameable, τινί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. b with accusative of things only, censure, οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἐπιτιμῶ [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—passive, τὸ..ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν ἐπιτιμώμενον [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιτιμάω

epitimao

from 1909 and 5091; to tax upon, i.e. censure or admonish; by

implication, forbid:--(straitly) charge, rebuke.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 5091

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιτιμάω

v.

I rebuke, chide, admonish, warn

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιτιμάω epitimaō 29x

pr. to set a value upon; to assess a penalty; to allege as a crimination; hence, to reprove, chide, censure, rebuke, reprimand, Mt. 19:13; Lk. 23:40; in NT to admonish strongly, enjoin strictly, Mt. 12:16; Lk. 17:3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιτιμάω fut. ήσω to lay a value upon, Lat. aestimare: hence,

to shew honour to, τινά Hdt.

to raise in price:—Pass. to rise in price, Dem.

of judges, to lay a penalty on a person, Hdt.

c. acc. to censure, Dem.; also c. dat., id. Dem.: absol., Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAO-3S — Verb · aorist · active · optative · third person · singular
aorist active optative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAO-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Optative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

re-buk': As a verb "rebuke" is in the Old Testament the translation of ga`ar and yakhach; another word, ribh, in Ne 5:7, is in the Revised Version (British and American) translated "contended with." "Rebuke" (noun) is most frequently the translation of ge`arah; also in the King James Version of cherpah (Isa 25:8; Jer 15:15, the Revised Version (British and American) "reproach"), and of a few other words signifying reproach, etc. "Rebuker" (mucar, literally, "correction," "chastisement") in Ho 5:2 has the Revised Version margin "Hebrew `rebuke.'" In the New Testament "to rebuke" is most often the translation of epitimao (Mt…

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Drunkenness 110c. AD 40

ὁ δὴ τούτοις ἐπιτιμῶν τὸν ἐπινίκιον ὕμνον ἐξάρχων ἐδείχθη.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 16.262c. AD 75–95

καὶ καταλαβὼν οὕτως ἔχοντα τὸ μὲν ἐπιτιμᾶν ἢ φάναι γενέσθαι τι προπετὲς αὐτῷ τελέως ἀνοίκειον εἰς τὸν καιρὸν ἡγήσατο·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 1st c. BC 2nd c. AD undated 2nd c. BC
BGU 4 1185Herakleopolites62 BC–61 BC

ἀγνοημάτων ἁμαρτημάτων καταγνωσμάτων … ων σκεπεστικῶν αἰτιῶν πασῶν ἐπιγραφῶν ζημιῶν παραλογειῶν ἐπιτίμων προστίμων … τοῦ ιθ ἔτους ὀφειλημάτων βασιλικῶν πάντων … ουλ … τισὶν τούτων προσηγμένοις

BGU 8 1844Herakleopolites51 BC–50 BC

βεβαιώσαντες καὶ ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ διακωλύσειν μήτʼ ἐνκαλέσειν τρόπωι ὡιτινιοῦν ὁρισθέντων κατὰ τοῦ παραβαίνοντος ἐπιτίμων, … … σθος ἀπηλπικὼς τὸ καλῶς ἔχον κατὰ τὴν τοῦ ὁμολογίου συγγραφὴν διακωλύσειν τρόποις

P.Fam.Tebt. 17Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 133

τῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ προγεγραμμένου μου πατρὸς ἀπολελειμμένων πρὸς τὸ μὴ διοχλεῖσθαί με ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐπιτίμων. διευτύχει. Ἡρακλείδης ὁ καὶ Οὐαλέριoς Ἡρακλείδου Μάρωνος Ματίδιος ὁ καὶ Καλλιτέκνειος ἐπιδέδωκα καθὼς πρόκειται.

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
σοιsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Jude as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Amplified meaning
as a direct address, in a personal manner
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2DS — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singular
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

<the> But Michael the archangel, when with the devil disputing he was reasoning about <the> Moses’ body, not did dare a judgment to bring against [him] blasphemy but said; Would [that] he rebuke you [the] Lord.
κύριος.kurios [the] Lord. G2962 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
718× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Jude than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for lord or master, used to address God or a person in authority, showing respect and power. In the New Testament, it appears in Matthew 9:38 and Mark 12:9. It signifies a controller or ruler.
Amplified meaning
God, the Supreme Authority
Tyndale gloss
lord: God
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κύριος is a Greek word meaning 'lord' or 'master,' derived from the concept of authority. It is used in various contexts, referring to God, Jesus, and earthly masters. In the New Testament, it often denotes divine authority, as seen in verses like Matthew 12:8. The term can also express respect when addressing others, such as teachers or magistrates.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — κύριος, δεσπότης from a scan

A MAN, according to the later Greek grammarians, was δεσπότης in respect of his slaves (Plato, Legg. vi. 756 e), therefore οἰκοδεσπότης, but κύριος in regard of his wife and children ; who in speaking either to him or of him, would give him this title of honour; “as Sara obeyed Abraham, calling him lord” (κύριον αὐτὸν καλοῦσα, I Pet. ili. 6: ef. Plutarch, De Virt. Mul. 5. vv. Μίκκα καὶ Meyoro). There is a certain truth in this distinction. Undoubtedly there lies in κύριος the sense of an authority owning limitations—moral limitations it may be; it is implied too that the wielder of this authority will not exclude, in wielding it, a consideration of their good over whom it is exercised; while the δεσπότης exercises a more unrestricted power and absolute domination, confessing no such limitations or restraints. He who addresses another as δέσποτα, puts an emphasis of submission into his…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κύριος, -α, -ον (also -ος, -ον),

[in LXX (subst.) chiefly for יהוה, also for אָדוֹן, בַּעַל, etc.;]

having power (κῦρος) or authority; as subst., ὁ κ., lord, master;

in general: c. gen. rei, Mt 9:38 20:8, Mk 12:9 13:35, Lk 19:33; τ. σαββάτου, Mt 12:8, Mk 2:28, Lk 6:5; c. gen. pers., δούλου, etc., Mt 10:24, Lk 14:21, Ac 16:16, al.; absol., opp. to οἱ δοῦλοι,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κύριος, -ov, 6, (prop. an 2dj. κύριος, -a, - 1, also of two term.; prop. i. q. ὁ ἔχων κῦρος, having power or author ity), [fr. Pind. down], he to whom a person or thing belongs, about which he has the power of deciding; master, lord; used a. univ. of the possessor and disposer of a thing, the owner, (Sept. for }}18, 5y3): with gen. of the thing, as τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος, Mt. xx. 8; xxi. 40; Mk. xii. 9; Lk. xx. 15; rod θερισμοῦ, Mt. ix. 38; Lk. x. 2; τῆς οἰκίας, the master, Mk. xiii. 35 (Judg. xix. 12); τοῦ πώλου, Lk. xix. 33; τοῦ σαββάτου, possessed of the power to determine what is suitable to the sabbath, and of releasing himself and others from its obligations, Mt. xii. 8; Mk. ii. 28; Lk. vi. 5. with gen. of a pers., one who has control of the person, the master [A. V. lord]; in the household: δούλου, παιδίσκης, οἰκονόμου, Mt. x. 24; Lk. xii. 46 sq.; xiv. 21; xvi. 3, 5; Acts xvi. 16, 19…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κύριος BGU III. ο49᾽ (c. A.D. 300) κυρίῳ μου ἀδελφῷ “Hpa, a sister (and probably wife) —P Oxy IV. 7441 (B.c. 1) (= Selections, p. 32) Ἱλαρίωνα (/.—tov)”"Adure τῆι ἀδελφῆι πλεῖστα Χαίρειν, and even a son—zd. I. 123} (iii/iv A.D.) κυρίῳ pov vid Διονυσοθέωνι. (3) It is, however, with the religious use of κύριος that we are specially concerned, and in keeping with the conception of ‘‘lordship,’’ which was so characteristic of Oriental religions, we may begin by noticing its common use in connexion with the cult of the Egyptian God Sarapis. Letters frequently begin with some such formula as—rpd μὲν πάντων εὔχομαί σε ὑιαίνειν (1. by—) καὶ τὸ προσκύνημά cov ποιῶ παρὰ τῷ κυρίῳ Σιαράπιδι, ‘before all else I pray for your health, and I supplicate the lord Sarapis on your behalf”’ (P Fay 127°—ii/iii a.p.), and we may add, owing to the striking resemblance of phraseology to 1 Cor 1024 such…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κύριος (kurios) — lord: God.

κύριος [ῡ], α, ον,

also ος, ον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—Thess. κῦρρος [Refs 8th c.BC+]:

I. of persons, having power or authority over, with genitive, Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὶν ἄν σε κ. στήσω τέκνων put thee in possession of.., [Refs 5th c.BC+], of the god to whom a temple is dedicated, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; τῶν αὑτοὺ κ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θανάτου κ. τινός with power of life and death over, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. κύριός εἰμι with infinitive, I have authority to do, am entitled to do, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οὗτος κ. ὁρκωμοτεῖν (probably to be read instead of -ῶν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; -ώτεροι δοῦναι better able to give, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also κ. τοῦ μὴ μεθυσθῆναι having power not to.., [Refs]: with accusative et infinitive, κ. εἶναι ἢ τοίαν εἶναι [πόλιν] ἢ τοίαν [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κύριος

kurios

from kuros (supremacy); supreme in authority, i.e. (as noun)

controller; by implication, Master (as a respectful title):-- God,

Lord, master, Sir.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κύριος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

lord, Lord, master, sir

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κύριος kyrios 717x

a lord, master, Mt. 12:8; an owner, possessor, Mt. 20:8; a potentate, sovereign, Acts 25:26; a power, deity, 1 Cor. 8:5; the Lord, Jehovah, Mt. 1:22; the Lord Jesus Christ, Mt. 24:42; Mk. 16:19; Lk. 10:1; Jn. 4:1; 1 Cor. 4:5; freq.; κύριε, a term of respect of various force, Sir, Lord, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Lord

There are various Hebrew and Greek words so rendered.

(1.) Heb. Jehovah, has been rendered in the English Bible LORD, printed in small capitals. This is the proper name of the God of the Hebrews. The form “Jehovah” is retained only in Ex. 6:3; Ps. 83:18; Isa. 12:2; 26:4, both in the Authorized and the Revised Version.

(2.) Heb. ‘adon, means one possessed of absolute control. It denotes a master, as of slaves (Gen. 24:14, 27), or a ruler of his subjects (45:8), or a husband, as lord of his wife (18:12).

The old plural form of this Hebrew word is ’adonai. From a superstitious reverence for the name “Jehovah,” the Jews, in reading their Scriptures, whenever that name…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

[GOD]

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This name belongs to God by preeminence; and in this sense ought never to be given to any creature. Jesus Christ, as the Messiah, the Son of God, and equal with the Father, is often called Lord in Scripture, especially in the writing of Paul. The word LORD, in the English Bible, when printed in small capitals, stands always for JEHOVAH in the Hebrew. See JEHOVAH.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ A prince Jos 13:3; Jud 3:3; 1Sa 5:8; 6:4

→ See GOD

→ See JESUS

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
86%lord
lord86% · 647×master6% · 47×other renderings3% · 22×other renderings5% · 37×

753 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject31%adverbial30%object17%predicate4%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 718 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςὄνομαname, character,χάριςgrace, favor, ki
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
ἐν
εἰμίI am, existσύδέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakκαλέωI call, invite, πρός
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώπατήρfather, Father, ὅτιthat, since, bec
κύριος[the] Lord.718×
what comes after →
ἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesusκαίand, even, also,κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἀμπελώνa vineyardδέbut, on the othe
ἸησοῦςJesus
Χριστόςanointed, the Meκαίand, even, also,μετά
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegσωτήρa savior, delive
αὐτός
χρείαneed, necessity,εἰCondλέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκύριος · 718× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Romans 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Thessalonians Revelation 2 Thessalonians Mark

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament23 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.265c. AD 75–95

Τῶν δὲ Ἰσάκου παίδων Ἡσαῦς, περὶ ὃν μάλιστα ὁ πατὴρ ἐσπουδάκει, τεσσαράκοντα γεγονὼς ἔτη γαμεῖ Ἄδαν τὴν Ἥλωνος καὶ Ἀλιβάμην τὴν Εὐσεβεῶνος δυναστευόντων ἐν Χαναναίοις ἀνδρῶν θυγατέρας, ἑαυτὸν ποιήσας τῆς περὶ τὸν γάμον ἐξουσίας κύριον καὶ μηδὲ τῷ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 33Thebais104 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν κζ μέση μελίχρως λεύκωμα ὀφθαλμόν, μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύρριν αἱ τρεῖς τῶν Ψεμμίνιος μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῶν ἀδελφοῦ Παχνούβιος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου καὶ συνπωλουμένου, ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτοῖς πατρικῆς γῆς

P.Cair. Cat. 10353 descr.Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites108 BC–99 BC

Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ὁμολογεῖ Πετεσοῦχος Πετεαρσεμθέως Τορτομίννει Σχώτου Περσίνη μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς υἱοῦ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Ἁρπαήσιος ἐκ τῶν φρουρῶν περὶ τοῦ ἐὰν βεβαιώσῃ αὐτῶι

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

τῆς Βελλέους ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσης μελιχρόου στρογγυλοπροσώπου εὐθύρινος οὐλὴ μετώπῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν μετὰ κυρίου Πτολεμαίου τοῦ Ψενμεγχείους ὡς ἐτῶν λε μέσου … πάντες τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Παθυρίτου τὴν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate